You are on page 1of 261

Technical Handbook

Alcatel
1692MSE
8 Channels CWDM System

1692MSE REL.3.2A

3AL 97869 AAAA ED.01

3AL 97869 AAAA ED.01

1692MSE REL.3.2A TECHNICAL HDBK


CONTENTS
HANDBOOK GUIDE ........................................................................................................... 13
1

HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK ........................................... 14


1.1 General information ......................................................................................................... 14
1.2 Handbook applicability..................................................................................................... 14
1.3 Product-release handbooks ............................................................................................... 15
1.4 Handbook Structure.......................................................................................................... 17
1.5 Handbook configuration check.......................................................................................... 18
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts........................................................................ 18
1.5.2 Notes on Release 1.0 ED.01...................................................................................... 19
1.5.3 Notes on Release 1.1 ED.01...................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Notes on Release 1.2A ED.01 ................................................................................... 19
1.5.5 Notes on Release 1.2A1 ED.01 ................................................................................. 20
1.5.6 Notes on Release 1.4 ED.01...................................................................................... 20
1.5.7 Notes on Release 3.0 ED.01...................................................................................... 20
1.5.8 Notes on Release 3.1 ED.01...................................................................................... 21
1.5.9 Notes on Release 3.2A ED.01 ................................................................................... 21

COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. .................................................................... 22


2.1
2.2
2.3

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ................................................................................. 23


Safety............................................................................................................................... 23
Environmental constraints ................................................................................................. 23

SAFETY NORMS AND LEBELS ....................................................................................... 24


3.1 First aid for electric shock.................................................................................................. 24
3.2 Safety Rules ...................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.1 General rules ........................................................................................................... 26
3.2.2 Labels indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command.................................................... 27
3.2.3 Dangerous electrical voltages.................................................................................... 28
3.2.4 Harmful optical signals ............................................................................................. 29
3.2.5 Risks of explosions .................................................................................................... 31
3.2.6 Moving mechanical parts .......................................................................................... 31
3.2.7 Heat-radiating mechanical parts ............................................................................... 31
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook ......................................................................... 32

OTHER NORMS AND LABELS ....................................................................................... 33


4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility ........................................................................................... 33
4.1.1 General norms - Installation...................................................................................... 33
4.1.2 General norms - Turn-on, Tests & Operation ............................................................. 33
4.1.3 General norms - Maintenance................................................................................... 34
4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)........................................................................................... 34
4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions ........................................................................................ 35
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment ......................................................................................... 35

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................. 40

GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION............................................... 43


6.1
6.2
6.3

ED

Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation..................................... 43


Handbook supply to Customers......................................................................................... 43
Aims of standard Customer Documentation ....................................................................... 43

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

1/259

6.4 Handbook Updating......................................................................................................... 44


6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) ..................... 44
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release...................................................................... 45
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM.................................................................... 45
6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM ....................................................... 45
6.5.2 Use of the CD-ROM.................................................................................................. 45
6.5.3 CD-ROM identification.............................................................................................. 46
6.5.4 CD-ROM updating ................................................................................................... 46
DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................................................... 48
1

FUNCTIONAL DESIGN ................................................................................................. 49


1.1 Basic equipment configurations ......................................................................................... 51
1.1.1 Line terminal ............................................................................................................ 51
1.1.2 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)................................................................ 51
1.1.3 Regenerator ............................................................................................................. 53
1.1.4 CPE ......................................................................................................................... 53
1.2 Network architectures ....................................................................................................... 54
1.2.1 Ring networks ........................................................................................................... 54
1.2.2 Point to point links .................................................................................................... 54
1.2.3 CPE configuration in ring network.............................................................................. 55
1.2.4 CPE configuration in point to point links..................................................................... 55
1.3 Network protection ........................................................................................................... 56
1.4 Description of the functions ............................................................................................... 56
1.4.1 Main function in different configuration...................................................................... 56
1.4.2 Description of the functions ....................................................................................... 61
1.5 Device description ............................................................................................................ 72
1.5.1 Shelf list ................................................................................................................... 72
1.5.2 Shelf and boards designation and reference .............................................................. 73
1.5.3 Slot allocations ......................................................................................................... 78
1.6 System Configuration........................................................................................................ 80
1.6.1 Configuration criteria................................................................................................ 80
1.6.2 Terminal configuration.............................................................................................. 80
1.6.3 OADM configuration ................................................................................................ 85
1.6.4 Regenerator configuration......................................................................................... 87
1.6.5 CPE configuration..................................................................................................... 89
1.7 Optical safety ................................................................................................................... 91
1.7.1 General information ................................................................................................. 91
1.8 1692MSE System characteristics ........................................................................................ 92
1.8.1 Power supply ............................................................................................................ 92
1.8.2 Equipment and shelf control...................................................................................... 93
1.8.3 Management and monitoring interfaces..................................................................... 93
1.9 Environmental characteristics ............................................................................................ 95
1.9.1 ETSI compliancy........................................................................................................ 95
1.9.2 Environmental constraints ......................................................................................... 96

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 101


2.1 Rack design.................................................................................................................... 101
2.2 CO shelf ........................................................................................................................ 102
2.2.1 Shelf organization................................................................................................... 102
2.2.2 Shelf dimensions .................................................................................................... 103
2.3 Compact shelf ................................................................................................................ 103
2.3.1 Shelf organization................................................................................................... 104
2.3.2 Shelf dimensions .................................................................................................... 104
2.4 Unit front view ................................................................................................................ 105

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

2/259

2.5 Power consumption and weight ....................................................................................... 108


2.5.1 Maximum power consumption and weight of the boards and units............................ 108
2.5.2 Maximum power consumption of the equipment ...................................................... 108
2.6 FIT of 1692 MSE............................................................................................................. 109
2.7 Equipment connections ................................................................................................... 110
2.7.1 Optical connections ................................................................................................ 110
2.7.2 Management connections ....................................................................................... 112
2.7.3 Power supply connections........................................................................................ 115
3

UNITS DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................. 116


3.1 Wavelength Adapter ....................................................................................................... 116
3.1.1 Description............................................................................................................. 117
3.1.2 Optical interfaces ................................................................................................... 118
3.1.3 WLA configurations................................................................................................. 119
3.1.4 Performance monitoring ......................................................................................... 124
3.1.5 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 125
3.2 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) ....................................................................... 128
3.2.1 Description............................................................................................................. 128
3.2.2 OCC10 configuration ............................................................................................. 129
3.2.3 Optical characteristics ............................................................................................. 131
3.2.4 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 132
3.3 2XGE-FC Unit ................................................................................................................ 134
3.3.1 Description............................................................................................................. 134
3.3.2 Optical interfaces ................................................................................................... 134
3.3.3 2XGE-FC configuration ........................................................................................... 134
3.3.4 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 136
3.4 MUX/DEMUX units (C-MDX)............................................................................................ 138
3.4.1 C-MDX-E-U-S ......................................................................................................... 138
3.4.2 C-MDX-U ............................................................................................................... 142
3.4.3 C-MDX-B-S ............................................................................................................ 146
3.4.4 C-MDX-B ............................................................................................................... 149
3.5 MUX/DEMUX units (C-MDX2).......................................................................................... 152
3.5.1 C-MDX2-E-U-S ....................................................................................................... 152
3.5.2 C-MDX2-U ............................................................................................................. 153
3.5.3 C-MDX2-E-1-S ....................................................................................................... 154
3.5.4 C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S .................................................................................................. 157
3.6 OADM units (C-OAD)..................................................................................................... 161
3.6.1 C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S ................................................................................................ 161
3.6.2 C-OAD-U-1-XX ...................................................................................................... 165
3.6.3 C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S............................................................................................. 168
3.6.4 C-OAD-U-2-XXXX................................................................................................... 172
3.6.5 C-OAD-B-1-XX-S .................................................................................................... 175
3.6.6 C-OAD-B-1-XX ....................................................................................................... 179
3.7 OADM2 units (C-OAD2)................................................................................................. 182
3.7.1 C-OAD2-E-U-1-XX-S .............................................................................................. 182
3.7.2 C-OAD2-U-1-XX .................................................................................................... 184
3.7.3 C-OAD2-E-U-2-XXXX-S........................................................................................... 185
3.7.4 C-OAD2-U-2-XXXX................................................................................................. 186
3.7.5 C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S.................................................................................... 187
3.7.6 C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX.......................................................................................... 191
3.8 ESC-LC board ................................................................................................................ 195
3.8.1 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 196
3.9 C-4xANY card................................................................................................................ 198
3.9.1 Description............................................................................................................. 198
3.9.2 C-4xANY optical characteristics ............................................................................... 201

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

3/259

3.9.3 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 204


3.10 OSC unit........................................................................................................................ 206
3.10.1 Description........................................................................... 206
3.10.2 Functional description of the configurations.............................................................. 206
3.10.3 Optical characteristics ............................................................................................. 207
3.10.4 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 208
3.11 OMSP unit...................................................................................................................... 209
3.11.1 Description ..................................................................................... 209
3.11.2 Optical characteristics ............................................................................................. 209
3.11.3 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 210
3.11.4 Front panel wiring .................................................................................................. 210
3.12 I-LINK-S unit................................................................................................................... 211
3.12.1 Description.. ................................................................................... 211
3.12.2 Front panel description ........................................................................................... 212
3.13 General user interfaces ................................................................................................... 214
3.13.1 Power Supply Card ................................................................................................. 214
3.13.2 Power Management Unit (PMU)............................................................................... 215
3.13.3 Housekeeping board (HK) ....................................................................................... 219
3.13.4 Rack Alarm Interface board (RAI) ............................................................................. 220
3.13.5 LAN-Q board.. ...................................................................................... 222
3.14 FANS unit....................................................................................................................... 224
3.14.1 FAN-CO unit.. .......................................................................................... 224
3.14.2 FAN unit. ..................................................................................................... 224
3.14.3 LEDs signification.................................................................................................... 225
MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................ 227
4

MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................... 228


4.1 Maintenance introduction................................................................................................ 228
4.1.1 General safety rules ................................................................................................ 228
4.1.2 General rules ......................................................................................................... 228
4.1.3 Maintenance - definitions ........................................................................................ 228
4.1.4 Instruments And Accessories.................................................................................... 229
4.2 Preventive maintenance .................................................................................................. 229
4.2.1 Routine maintenance every year .............................................................................. 229
4.2.2 Routine maintenance of fan filter ............................................................................. 229
4.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) ........................................................................ 230
4.4 Set of spare parts ........................................................................................................... 230
4.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts............................................................................................. 230
4.4.2 General rules on spare parts management .............................................................. 230
4.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management ............................................................ 231
4.5 Operating advices .......................................................................................................... 231
4.6 Repair Form ................................................................................................................... 232

DISMANTLING & RECYLING............................................................................................. 234


5

DISMANTLING & RECYCLING .................................................................................... 235


5.1 WEEE general information .............................................................................................. 235
5.2 How to disassembly equipment ....................................................................................... 237
5.2.1 Waste codes detailed information............................................................................ 237
5.2.2 Tools necessary for disassembly .............................................................................. 242
5.2.3 Subrack disassembly............................................................................................... 242
5.2.4 Unit disassembly..................................................................................................... 249
5.2.5 Hazardous materials and components ..................................................................... 255
5.3 Eco declaration .............................................................................................................. 257

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

4/259

FIGURES
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
Figure 13
Figure 14
Figure 15
Figure 16
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 19
Figure 20
Figure 21
Figure 22
Figure 23
Figure 24
Figure 25
Figure 26
Figure 27
Figure 28
Figure 29
Figure 30
Figure 31
Figure 32
Figure 33
Figure 34
Figure 35
Figure 36
Figure 37
Figure 38
Figure 39
Figure 40
Figure 41
Figure 42
Figure 43
Figure 44
Figure 45
Figure 46
Figure 47
Figure 48
Figure 49
Figure 50
Figure 51
Figure 52
Figure 53

ED

01

Labels for units with stiffening bar...........................................................................36


Labels for units without stiffening bar ......................................................................37
Label identifying label on catalogue .......................................................................37
Label specifying serial No. .....................................................................................37
Labels on the SFP ..................................................................................................38
SFP label description ..............................................................................................38
SFP label example .................................................................................................38
CE label ................................................................................................................38
WEEE label............................................................................................................38
Electrostatic label...................................................................................................39
Labels on shelf ......................................................................................................39
1692MSE R3.2A in line terminal configuration ........................................................51
1692MSE R3.2A in OADM configuration ................................................................52
1692MSE R3.2A in back to back terminal configuration...........................................53
1692MSE R3.2A in regenerator configuration .........................................................53
Block diagram of CPE ............................................................................................53
1692MSE in ring networks .....................................................................................54
1692MSE in point to point configuration .................................................................54
1692MSE in ring networks with CPE .......................................................................55
1692MSE in point to point links with CPE ................................................................55
Functional synopsis in unidirectional Line Terminal configuration .............................56
Functional synopsis in bi-directional Line Terminal configuration ..............................57
Functional synopsis in unidirectional OADM configuration .......................................57
Functional synopsis in bi-directional OADM configuration........................................58
Functional synopsis in regenerator configuration (use MUX/DMUX) ..........................59
Functional synopsis in regenerator configuration (use OADM)..................................59
One-channel CPE configuration .............................................................................60
Two-channel CPE configuration ..............................................................................60
Transponder function.............................................................................................61
TDM concentration function....................................................................................62
CWDM MUX side...................................................................................................63
8:1 MUX used as MUX/DMUX ................................................................................63
CWDM DMUX side ................................................................................................63
1 ch Add/drop function in unidirectional transmission .............................................64
2 ch Add/drop function in unidirectional transmission .............................................64
1 ch add/drop function in bi-directional transmission ..............................................65
4 ch add/drop function ..........................................................................................65
1310nm circulator .................................................................................................66
1310nm broadband filter ......................................................................................66
Optical supervisory channel management in line terminal and OADM configuration.66
OMSP application without OADM...........................................................................67
OMSP application with OADM ...............................................................................67
SNCP in a ring network..........................................................................................68
Electrical SNCP......................................................................................................68
Optical SNCP ........................................................................................................69
BSNCP+EPS using two WLA3C...............................................................................69
C-4xANY with O-SNCP (use WLA-P) .......................................................................70
C-4xANY with O-SNCP (use OMSP)........................................................................70
C-4xANY with E-SNCP ...........................................................................................70
16 channels upgradable ........................................................................................71
Four compact shelves used in a NE (front view) .......................................................72
One CO shelf used in a NE (front view) ..................................................................73
An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (only WLA)....................81

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

5/259

Figure 54
An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (using compact shelves,
only C-4xANY)...................................................................................................................82
Figure 55
An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (using CO shelves, only
C-4xANY)..........................................................................................................................83
Figure 56
An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (using CO shelves, mixed
WLA and C-4xANY) ...........................................................................................................84
Figure 57
Slot allocations in bi-directional application ............................................................85
Figure 58
An example for slot allocations in unidirectional OADM application (1 channel
add/drop) .........................................................................................................................85
Figure 59
An example for slot allocations in unidirectional OADM application (2 channels
add/drop) .........................................................................................................................86
Figure 60
An example for slot allocations in unidirectional OADM application (4 channels
add/drop) .........................................................................................................................86
Figure 61
An example for slot allocations in bi-directional OADM application..........................87
Figure 62
An example for slot allocations in regenerator applications (MUX/DMUX).................88
Figure 63
An example for slot allocations in regenerator application (OADM)..........................89
Figure 64
An example for slot allocations in one-channel CPE application ...............................90
Figure 65
An example for slot allocations in two-channel CPE application................................90
Figure 66
1692MSE input power stage (same as PSC2) ..........................................................92
Figure 67
Equipment and shelf control...................................................................................93
Figure 68
Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: no temperature controlled storage location .........97
Figure 69
Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations ...............99
Figure 70
Rack description ..................................................................................................101
Figure 71
Shelf organization................................................................................................102
Figure 72
Shelf front view with cover ....................................................................................102
Figure 73
Shelf dimensions .................................................................................................103
Figure 74
1692MSE single shelf...........................................................................................103
Figure 75
1692 MSE compact shelf mechanical structure ......................................................104
Figure 76
Shelf dimension and shelf partitioning ..................................................................104
Figure 77
ESC-LC front view................................................................................................105
Figure 78
LAN-Q board front view.......................................................................................105
Figure 79
PSC2 board front view .........................................................................................105
Figure 80
FAN board front view...........................................................................................105
Figure 81
FAN-CO board example......................................................................................105
Figure 82
OSC board front view ..........................................................................................106
Figure 83
OMSP board front view........................................................................................106
Figure 84
WLA3C board front view ......................................................................................106
Figure 85
WLA3COP board front view .................................................................................106
Figure 86
OCC10-NA board front view ...............................................................................106
Figure 87
2XGE-FC board front view ...................................................................................106
Figure 88
C-OAD-E-U-1-6161-S board front view................................................................106
Figure 89
C-OAD2-E-U-4-55575961-S board front view......................................................106
Figure 90
C-MDX-E-U-S board front view.............................................................................106
Figure 91
C-4xANY board front view ...................................................................................106
Figure 92
HK board front view.............................................................................................107
Figure 93
RAI board front view ............................................................................................107
Figure 94
I-LINK-S board front view .....................................................................................107
Figure 95
LC optical connectors...........................................................................................110
Figure 96
LC optical connectors...........................................................................................110
Figure 97
MU optical connectors .........................................................................................111
Figure 98
MU optical connectors .........................................................................................111
Figure 99
MU optical connectors .........................................................................................111
Figure 100 Block diagram of WLA3C boards .........................................................................116
Figure 101 Block diagram of WLA3COP boards.....................................................................117
Figure 102 Add and drop matrix configuration.......................................................................120

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

6/259

Figure 103
Figure 104
Figure 105
Figure 106
Figure 107
Figure 108
Figure 109
Figure 110
Figure 111
Figure 112
Figure 113
Figure 114
Figure 115
Figure 116
Figure 117
Figure 118
Figure 119
Figure 120
Figure 121
Figure 122
Figure 123
Figure 124
Figure 125
Figure 126
Figure 127
Figure 128
Figure 129
Figure 130
Figure 131
Figure 132
Figure 133
Figure 134
Figure 135
Figure 136
Figure 137
Figure 138
Figure 139
Figure 140
Figure 141
Figure 142
Figure 143
Figure 144
Figure 145
Figure 146
Figure 147
Figure 148
Figure 149
Figure 150
Figure 151
Figure 152
Figure 153
Figure 154
Figure 155
Figure 156
Figure 157

ED

01

Local loopback matrix configuration .....................................................................120


Remote loopback matrix configuration ..................................................................121
Local-remote loopback matrix configuration .........................................................121
Electrical SNCP matrix configuration .....................................................................122
Optical SNCP matrix configuration .......................................................................123
B-SNCP matrix configuration in one WLA3C .........................................................124
Front panel of WLA3C board ...............................................................................125
Front panel of WLA3COP board...........................................................................126
Block diagram of OCC10 board ..........................................................................128
Add/Drop configuration of OCC10 board ............................................................129
Client loopback configuration of OCC10 board....................................................130
Line loopback configuration of OCC10 board ......................................................130
Front panel of OCC10 board...............................................................................132
Block diagram of 2XGE-FC board ........................................................................134
Communication between two 2XGE-FC board (example) .......................................135
Local loopback configuration of 2XGE-FC board...................................................135
Remote loopback configuration of 2XGE-FC board ...............................................135
Front panel of 2XGE-FC board.............................................................................136
C-MDX-E-U-S block diagram ...............................................................................138
Front panel of C-MDX-E-U-S board ......................................................................140
C-MDX-U block diagram .....................................................................................142
Front panel of C-MDX-U board ............................................................................144
C-MDX-B-S block diagram ...................................................................................146
Front panel of C-MDX-B-S board..........................................................................147
C-MDX-B block diagram ......................................................................................149
Front panel of C-MDX-B board.............................................................................150
C-MDX2-E-U-S block diagram .............................................................................152
C-MDX2-U block diagram ...................................................................................153
C-MDX2-E-1-S block diagram..............................................................................154
Front panel of C-MDX2-E-1-S board ....................................................................155
C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S block diagram .........................................................................157
Front panel of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S board................................................................159
C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S block diagram.......................................................................161
Front panel of C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S board..............................................................163
C-OAD-U-1-XX block diagram.............................................................................165
Front panel of C-OAD-U-1-XX board....................................................................166
C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S block diagram ...................................................................168
Front panel of C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S board ..........................................................170
C-OAD-U-2-XXXX block diagram .........................................................................172
Front panel of C-OAD-U-2-XXXX board ................................................................173
C-OAD-B-1-XX-S block diagram ..........................................................................175
Front panel of C-OAD-B-1-XX-S board .................................................................177
C-OAD-B-1-XX block diagram .............................................................................179
Front panel of C-OAD-B-1-XX board ....................................................................180
C-OAD2-E-U-1-XX-S block diagram.....................................................................182
C-OAD2-U-1-XX block diagram...........................................................................184
C-OAD2-E-U-2-XXXX-S block diagram .................................................................185
C-OAD2-U-2-XXXX block diagram .......................................................................186
C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S block diagram ..........................................................187
Front panel of C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board.................................................189
C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX block diagram ................................................................191
Front panel of C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board.......................................................193
Front panel of ESC-LC board ...............................................................................196
C-4xANY block diagram ......................................................................................198
VC-4 allocation ...................................................................................................199

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

7/259

Figure 158
Figure 159
Figure 160
Figure 161
Figure 162
Figure 163
Figure 164
Figure 165
Figure 166
Figure 167
Figure 168
Figure 169
Figure 170
Figure 171
Figure 172
Figure 173
Figure 174
Figure 175
Figure 176
Figure 177
Figure 178
Figure 179
Figure 180
Figure 181
Figure 182
Figure 183
Figure 184
Figure 185
Figure 186
Figure 187
Figure 188
Figure 189
Figure 190
Figure 191
Figure 192
Figure 193

ED

01

Front panel of C-4xANY board.............................................................................204


OSC board in Line Terminal configuration ............................................................206
OSC board in OADM or back to back configuration .............................................207
Front panel of OSC board ...................................................................................208
OMSP block diagram...........................................................................................209
Front panel of OMSP board .................................................................................210
I-LINK-S block diagram........................................................................................211
Front panel of I-LINK-S board ..............................................................................212
PMU cabling scheme ...........................................................................................215
PMU block diagram.............................................................................................216
Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1692MSE R3.0, rack version ..................217
Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1692MSE R3.0, table version ................217
PMU front panel ..................................................................................................217
Block diagram of control HK board ......................................................................219
Block diagram of RAI unit.....................................................................................220
Block diagram of control LAN-Q board ................................................................222
LAN-Q board settings ..........................................................................................223
Fan shelf description and rack partitioning............................................................224
FAN description and Shelf partitioning ..................................................................224
Repair form .........................................................................................................232
Put on the market date.........................................................................................236
Waste code interpretation ....................................................................................237
Subrack front view ...............................................................................................242
Subrack rear view ................................................................................................242
Top cover removing .............................................................................................243
Back cover removing ...........................................................................................244
Back board removing ..........................................................................................245
Guides removing .................................................................................................246
Dummy front panels and fixing bars removing ......................................................247
Side wall removing ..............................................................................................248
Unit view .............................................................................................................249
Bottom cover removing ........................................................................................250
Levers removal ....................................................................................................251
Front panel, fibers and gasket removing ...............................................................252
Heat sink removing..............................................................................................253
Barket removing ..................................................................................................254

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

8/259

TABLES
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Table 16
Table 17
Table 18
Table 19
Table 20
Table 21
Table 22
Table 23
Table 24
Table 25
Table 26
Table 27
Table 28
Table 29
Table 30
Table 31
Table 32
Table 33
Table 34
Table 35
Table 36
Table 37
Table 38
Table 39
Table 40
Table 41
Table 42
Table 43
Table 44
Table 45
Table 46
Table 47
Table 48
Table 49
Table 50
Table 51
Table 52

ED

01

Handbooks related to the products hardware.........................................................15


Handbook related to the specific product SW management and local product control ...
............................................................................................................................15
Handbooks common to Alcatel network elements using 1320CT Rel.3.x platform .....16
Documentation on CD-ROM ..................................................................................16
Handbook configuration check...............................................................................18
References and standards ......................................................................................22
IEC 950 -Table 16: Over-temperature limits, Part 2.................................................32
Label references ....................................................................................................35
Frequency conversion of CWDM wavelengths .........................................................49
Relationship between protection and network application ........................................56
Shelf and boards designation and reference ...........................................................73
Slot allocations for compact shelves in 1692MSE release 3.2A .................................78
Slot allocations for CO shelf in 1692MSE release 3.2A ............................................79
Wavelength combination for unidirectional application............................................86
Wavelength combination for unidirectional application............................................86
Wavelength combination for a bi-directional application .........................................87
Valid tests and compliance criteria for immunity ......................................................95
Requirements for RF emission .................................................................................95
Main climatic conditions.........................................................................................97
Main climatic conditions.........................................................................................98
Main climatic conditions.......................................................................................100
Maximum power consumption of the units ............................................................108
Estimated maximum power consumption of the equipment ....................................108
FIT of 1692 MSE..................................................................................................109
Optical connections in 1692MSE ..........................................................................110
Connector access ................................................................................................112
Pins SUB-D connect access...................................................................................113
Pins RJ11 connector access ..................................................................................113
RJ 45 connector access ........................................................................................114
Connector access ................................................................................................114
Connector access ................................................................................................114
Connector access ................................................................................................115
Power supply 1 and 2: connector access ...............................................................115
Optical parameters for SFP transceivers used in the user side.................................118
Optical parameters for SFP transceivers used in the line side..................................119
Alarms usage in add and drop configuration ........................................................119
Alarms usage in the auto E-SNCP configuration ....................................................122
Alarms usage in the auto O-SNCP configuration ...................................................123
Alarms usage in the auto B-SNCP configuration ....................................................123
Front panel wiring of WLA3C board .....................................................................127
Front panel wiring of WLA3COP board.................................................................127
Meaning of WLA board front panel LEDs ..............................................................127
OCC10-NA optical characteristics ........................................................................131
OCC10-EC optical characteristics ........................................................................131
Front panel wiring of OCC10 board.....................................................................133
Meaning of OCC10 board front panel LEDs .........................................................133
Front panel wiring of 2XGE-FC board...................................................................137
Meaning of 2XGE-FC board front panel LEDs .......................................................137
C-MDX-E-U-S optical characteristics .....................................................................139
Front panel wiring of C-MDX-E-U-S board ............................................................141
Meaning of C-MDX-E-U-S board front panel LEDs.................................................141
C-MDX-U optical characteristics ...........................................................................143

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

9/259

Table 53
Front panel wiring of C-MDX-U board ..................................................................145
Table 54
Meaning of C-MDX-U board front panel LEDs.......................................................145
Table 55
C-MDX-B-S optical characteristics .........................................................................146
Table 56
Front panel wiring of C-MDX-B-S board................................................................148
Table 57
Meaning of C-MDX-B-S board front panel LEDs ....................................................148
Table 58
C-MDX-B optical characteristics ............................................................................149
Table 59
Front panel wiring of C-MDX-B board...................................................................151
Table 60
Meaning of C-MDX-B board front panel LEDs .......................................................151
Table 61
C-MDX2-E-1-S optical characteristics....................................................................154
Table 62
Front panel wiring of C-MDX2-E-1-S board ..........................................................156
Table 63
Meaning of C-MDX2-E-1-S board front panel LEDs ...............................................156
Table 64
Optical parameter of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S ...............................................................158
Table 65
Front panel wiring of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S board......................................................160
Table 66
Meaning of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S board front panel LEDs ..........................................160
Table 67
1-channel C-OAD module for unidirectional application .......................................162
Table 68
C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S optical characteristics.............................................................162
Table 69
Front panel wiring of C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S board ...................................................164
Table 70
Meaning of C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S board front panel LEDs ........................................164
Table 71
C-OAD-U-1-XX optical characteristics...................................................................165
Table 72
Front panel wiring of C-OAD-U-1-XX board .........................................................167
Table 73
Meaning of C-OAD-U-1-XX board front panel LEDs ..............................................167
Table 74
2-channel C-OAD modules for unidirectional applications.....................................169
Table 75
C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S optical characteristics .........................................................169
Table 76
Front panel wiring of C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S board................................................171
Table 77
Meaning of C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S board front panel LEDs ....................................171
Table 78
C-OAD-U-2-XXXX optical characteristics ...............................................................172
Table 79
Front panel wiring of C-OAD-U-2-XXXX board ......................................................174
Table 80
Meaning of C-OAD-U-2-XXXX board front panel LEDs ..........................................174
Table 81
C-OAD modules for bi-directional application ......................................................175
Table 82
C-OAD-B-1-XX-S optical characteristics ................................................................176
Table 83
Front panel wiring of C-OAD-B-1-XX-S board .......................................................178
Table 84
Meaning of C-OAD-B-1-XX-S board front panel LEDs............................................178
Table 85
C-OAD-B-1-XX optical characteristics ...................................................................179
Table 86
Front panel wiring of C-OAD-B-1-XX board ..........................................................181
Table 87
Meaning of C-OAD-B-1-XX board front panel LEDs...............................................181
Table 88
1-channel C-OAD2 module for unidirectional application .....................................183
Table 89
2-channel C-OAD2 module for unidirectional application .....................................185
Table 90
4-channel C-OAD2 module for unidirectional application .....................................187
Table 91
Add & Drop Channels Sequence ..........................................................................188
Table 92
C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board optical characteristics ......................................188
Table 93
Front panel wiring of C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board.......................................190
Table 94
Meaning of C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board front panel LEDs ...........................190
Table 95
4-channel C-OAD2 modules for unidirectional application ....................................191
Table 96
Add & Drop channels Sequence ...........................................................................192
Table 97
C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board optical characteristics ............................................192
Table 98
Front panel wiring of C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board.............................................194
Table 99
Meaning of C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board front panel LEDs .................................194
Table 100
Front panel connectors of the ESC board ..............................................................197
Table 101
Meaning of ESC front panel LEDs signification ......................................................197
Table 102
Relation between alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the ESC-LC LEDs and ETSI market rack (TRU).....................................197
Table 103
Allowed drawers association in each 2xANY .........................................................200
Table 104
Client Data Type configuration for drawer.............................................................201
Table 105
User Rx specification 1310nm ..............................................................................201
Table 106
User Rx specification 1310nm ..............................................................................202

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

10/259

Table 107
Table 108
Table 109
Table 110
Table 111
Table 112
Table 113
Table 114
Table 115
Table 116
Table 117
Table 118
Table 119
Table 120
Table 121
Table 122
Table 123
Table 124
Table 125

ED

01

User Rx specification (850nm) ..............................................................................202


User Tx specification (850nm) ..............................................................................203
Meaning of C-4xANY card front panel LEDs .........................................................205
Rx specification ....................................................................................................207
Tx specification ....................................................................................................207
Meaning of OSC board front panel LEDs ..............................................................208
Absolute maximum ratings ...................................................................................209
Front panel wiring of OMSP board .......................................................................210
Meaning of OMSP board front panel LEDs............................................................210
Front panel connectors of the I-LINK-S board ........................................................213
Meaning of I-LINK-S front panel LEDs signification ................................................213
Meaning of Power Supply Card LEDs signification .................................................214
Meaning of PMU LEDs signification.......................................................................218
Meaning of HK board LEDs signification ...............................................................219
Meaning of RAI board LEDs signification...............................................................221
Meaning of LAN-Q board LEDs signification .........................................................223
Meaning of FAN/FAN-CO board LEDs signification...............................................225
Items waste codes list ...........................................................................................238
List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment ...................255

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

11/259

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

12/259

HANDBOOK GUIDE

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

13/259

HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.1 General information


ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

1.2 Handbook applicability


This handbook applies to the following product-release:
Product
1692MSE

ED

01

Release
3.2A

Version
01

ANV P/N
3AL 97502 CCAA

Factory P/N

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

14/259

1.3 Product-release handbooks


The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this
Handbook and
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue
date of this Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated on the manuals front page consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1

Ref
[1]

[2]

[3]

Table 2
Ref
[4]

Handbooks related to the products hardware


Factory
Handbook
ANV Part No.
Part No.
1692MSE Rel.3.2A
3AL 97869 AAAA
Technical Handbook
Provides information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance,
Hardware setting documentation.
1692MSE Rel.3.2A
3AL 97869 ABAA
Installation Handbook
Provides step by step procedural instructions for unpacking, inspecting,
Alcatel Part Number, assembling, mounting and wiring bays, sub-frames,
I/O panels, ancillary items, and cabling.
1692MSE Rel.3.2A
Turn-up & Commissioning
3AL 97869 ACAA
Handbook
Provides procedures to support visual inspection, module installation,
Alcatel Part Number and provisioning; and local network element
verification tests and generic network tests.

This
HDBK

Handbook related to the specific product SW management and local product control
Factory
This
Handbook
ANV Part No.
Part No.
HDBK
1692MSE Rel.3.2A
3AL 97869 ADAA
Operators Handbook
Provide information regarding maintenance using the craft terminal.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

15/259

Table 3
Ref
[5]

[6]

Handbooks common to Alcatel network elements using 1320CT Rel.3.x platform


Factory
This
Handbook
ANV Part No.
Part No.
HDBK
1320CT Rel.3.x
3AL 79551 AAAA
Basic Operators Handbook
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all
1320CT(Craft terminal) of Alcatel Info-Model Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.6.5
3AL 88876 AAAA
Operators Handbook
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the
alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELB Rel.2.x Operators Handbook

Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the


Event Log Management software embedded in the 1320CT software
package.

[7]

Table 4
Ref
[8]

Documentation on CD-ROM

Handbook

ANV Part No.

1692MSERel.3.2A CD-ROM-DOC EN

3AL 97869 AEAA

Factory
Part No.

This
HDBK

Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [1] to [4]


Envisaged after the release of all handbooks
1320CT Rel.3.x CD-ROM-DOC EN

[9]

ED

3AL 88877 AAAA

3AL 79552 AAAA

Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [5] to [7]


Envisaged after the release of all handbooks

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

16/259

1.4 Handbook Structure


This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the Code Of Practice for
Instruction Handbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RECC. R29/82).
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE:

This section gives information on the whole handbook application,


composition and evolution. Moreover it lists the handbooks that the
Operator should have in order to carry out the tasks allowed by the
specific product-release this handbook refers to. It contains general
information on safety norms, EMC and type of labels that might be
affixed to the equipment.

DESCRIPTION:

It contains all the equipments general and detailed system features


including its application in the telecommunication network.
Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and
specifications (i.e., system, mechanical, electrical and/or optical).

MAINTENANCE:

It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and
repair procedures and restoration to normal operation through the
removal of faulty units and their replacement with spares.

DISMANTLING & RECYLING: It contains information for subrack/units dismantling and recycling,
list of hazardous materials and waste code.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

17/259

1.5 Handbook configuration check


1.5.1

List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new or modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend
N
M

=New part
=Modified part
=Not changed
Table 5

EDITION
DESCRIPTIONS
1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN
2
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
3
UNITS DESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE
4 MAINTENANCE
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING
5 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING

ED

01

R1.0
01
N
N
N
N
N
N

Handbook configuration check


R1.1
01
M
M
M
M
M
M

R1.2A
01
M
M
M
M
M
M
N
N

R1.2A1
01
M
M

R1.4
01
M

R3.0
01
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M

R3.1
01
M
M
M
M
M
M

R3.2A
01
M
M
M
M

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

18/259

1.5.2

Notes on Release 1.0 ED.01

Release 1.0 Ed.01, created on May 15th, 2003, is the first validated and officially released issue.
This document contains the technical documentation and the user manual for the 1692MSE release
1.0.
1.5.3

Notes on Release 1.1 ED.01

Release 1.1 ED.01, created on January 3rd, 2004, is the third validated and officially released issue
for 1692MSE system.
This document contains the technical documentation and the user manual for the 1692MSE release
1.1.
The release 1.1 contains the same features contained in 1.0A3, plus the following features:
Intershelf link master and intershelf link slave management
New Wavelength adapter management
New OMDX and OADM management
Multi-shelves managed as one NE
B&W SFP module used in C-4xANY
Performance monitoring
Back to back configuration as 1 NE
Security management
MIB Backup & Restore
Alarm Severity configurability
The following contents have been modified compared to Release 1.0A3:
Configuration in Operators handbook
Alarm handling in Operators handbook
Function design and system configuration in technical handbook
1.5.4

Notes on Release 1.2A ED.01

Release 1.2A ED.01, created on August 10th, 2004, is the fourth validated and officially released
issue for 1692MSE system.
This document contains the technical documentation and the user manual for the 1692MSE release
1.2A.
The release 1.2A contains the same features contained in the release 1.1, plus the following features:
The application of low cost WLA (named as WLA1A)
The application of Centre Office shelf (for short: CO shelf)
Laser forced on/off
WEEE information
The following contents have been modified compared to Release 1.1:
Configuration in Operators handbook
Function design and system configuration in technical handbook

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

19/259

1.5.5

Notes on Release 1.2A1 ED.01

Release 1.2A1 ED.01, created on December 10th, 2004, is a new validated and officially released
issue for 1692MSE system.
This document contains the technical documentation and the user manual for the 1692MSE release
1.2A1.
The release 1.2A1 contains the same features contained in the release 1.2A, plus the following
features:
The application of B-SNCP
The application of user defined SFP
The following contents have been modified compared to release 1.2A:
Functional design
Operators handbook
1.5.6

Notes on Release 1.4 ED.01

Release 1.4 ED.01, created on March 10th, 2005, is a new validated and officially released issue for
1692MSE system.
This document contains the technical documentation and the user manual for the 1692MSE release
1.4.
The release 1.4 contains the same features contained in the release 1.2A1, plus the following
features:
Abnormal conditions List (Protection, Loopback and Laser State)
Editing field (39 bytes long) for all the SFP
Display indication about main and spare ports of protection
Loopback warning message for adding/removing confirmation
The application of WLA2 in CO shelf
The following contents have been modified compared to release 1.2A1:
About the Graphical User Interface in Operators handbook
Configuration in Operators handbook
Alarm handling in Operators handbook
1.5.7

Notes on Release 3.0 ED.01

Release 3.0 ED.01, created on September 6th, 2005, is the first validated and officially released issue
for 1692MSE system.
This document contains the technical documentation and the user manual for the 1692MSE release
3.0.
The release 3.0 contains the same features contained in the release 1.4, plus the following features:
Support SFP modules with DDM function on WLA1A(-P) and WLA2(-P).
Security management

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

20/259

16 ch upgradable
ESC-LC replace ESC
Light RM management
The following contents have been modified compared to release 1.4:
Mechanical and Unit description in Technical handbook
Configuration in Operators handbook
1.5.8

Notes on Release 3.1 ED.01

Release 3.1 ED.01, created on April 6th, 2006, is the first validated and officially released issue for
1692MSE system.
This document contains the technical documentation for the 1692MSE release 3.1.
The release 3.1 contains the same features contained in the release 3.0, plus the following features:
Support 10 GbE signal transmission
Introduce new SFPs and board
The following contents have been updated compared to release 3.0:
Unit description
Optical parameter for units

1.5.9

Notes on Release 3.2A ED.01

Release 3.2A ED.01, created on July 6th, 2006, is the first validated and officially released issue for
1692MSE system.
This document contains the technical documentation for the 1692MSE release 3.2A.
The release 3.2A contains the same features contained in the release 3.1, plus the following features:
SDH B1 PM is supported on the line side of C-4xANY board
Introduce new items: L16.1, L16.2 and a SDH/SONET drawer
Introduce new boards: PSC3, 2XGE-FC, WLA3C and WLA3COP
The SDH/SONET drawer (P/N. 3AL86673AA**), C-WLA1(-P), C-WLA1a(-P) and C-WLA2-M(-P) are
cancelled in this release.
The following contents have been updated compared to release 3.1:
Unit description
Optical parameter for units
Performance monitoring description

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

21/259

Ref.

ED

COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.


Table 6
References and standards
Standard document
Date
Description

[1]

ITU-T Recommendation G.652

04/97

Characteristics of single mode optical fiber cable

[2]

ITU-T Recommendation G.653

04/97

Characteristics of dispersion shifted optical fiber cable

[3]

ITU-T Recommendation G.654

04/97

Characteristics of a cut-off shifted single mode optical fiber cable

[4]

ITU-T Recommendation G.655

10/96

Characteristics of non-zero dispersion shifted optical fiber cable

[5]

ITU-T Recommendation G.664

03/99

Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems

[6]

ITU-T Recommendation G.681

10/96

[7]

ITU-T Recommendation G.691

06/97

[8]

ITU-T Recommendation G.692

10/98

[9]

ITU-T Recommendation G.695

10/2003

Optical interfaces
applications.

[10]

ITU-T Recommendation G.671

01/2005

Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems.

[11]

ITU-T Recommendation
G.709-DRAFT

[12]

ITU-T Recommendation
G.798-DRAFT

06/99

Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy: equipment


functional blocks

[13]

ITU-T Recommendation G.805

11/95

Generic functional architecture of transport networks

[14]

ITU-T Recommendation G.813

08/96

Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)

[15]

ITU-T Recommendation G.825

03/93

The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based
on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

[16]

ITU-T Recommendation
G.871-DRAFT

[17]

ITU-T Recommendation G.872

02/99

Architecture of Optical Transport Networks

[18]

ITU-T Recommendation G.873DRAFT

03/99

Optical Transport Networks requirements

[19]

ITU-T Recommendation G.874DRAFT

06/99

Management aspect of the optical transport network element

[20]

ITU-T Recommendation G.694.2

05/02

Spectral Grids for WDM Applications: CWDM Wavelength Grid

[21]

ITU-T Recommendation G.957

07/95

[22]

ITU-T Recommendation G.958

11/94

[23]

ITU-T Recommendation G.959.1

[24]

ETS 300 019-1-1

05/94

[25]

ETS 300 119

01/94

Optical interfaces for multi-channel systems with optical amplifiers


for

coarse

wavelength

division

multiplexing

Network node interface for the optical transport network

Framework for Optical Networking Recommendations

Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the


Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Digital line systems based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy for use
on optical fiber cables
Optical network physical node interface

[26]

ETS 300 232 A1

06/93

[27]

ETS 300 386

12/94

[28]

IEC 825-1

08/93

[29]

IEC 950

04/99

[30]

IEEE802.3

[31]

GR - 63 - CORE

01

Functional characteristics of inter-office and long-haul line systems using


optical amplifiers, including optical multiplexing
Optical interfaces for single channel SDH systems with optical amplifiers,
and STM-64 systems

98
10/95

Environmental
conditions
telecommunication equipment

and

environmental

tests

for

European Telecommunication Standards for Equipment Practice


Transmission and multiplexing: Optical interfaces for equipment and
systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Public Telecommunication Network Equipment - Electro-Magnetic
Compatibility Requirements
Safety of Laser Products - Equipments classifications, requirements and
user's guide
Safety of Information Technology Equipments
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access
method and physical layer specifications
Network Equipment - Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical
Protection

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

22/259

Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety - Generic Criteria for


Network Telecommunication Equipment
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common
Generic Criteria
Television - Bit Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television
Systems

[32]

GR - 1089 - CORE

10/97

[33]

GR - 253 - CORE

02/99

[34]

SMPTE 292M-1998

98

[35]

SMPTE RP184-1996

96

Specification of Jitter in Bit-Serial Digital Systems

[36]

T11/98 - 055

98

Fiber Channel - Methodologies for Jitter Specification

2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)


The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives:
89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC directives), amended:
By the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28Th, 1992
By the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22Nd, 1993
Compliancy to EMC Norms is claimed in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms
Issue requisites: EN 55022 Limits and methods and measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of information technology equipment, August 1994 edition.
Compliancy Class: B
Immunity requisites: EN 50082-1 Electromagnetic compatibility-Generic immunity standard,
Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industry, January 1992 edition.
The equipment operates in the following environment: Telecommunication center.
WARNING
This is a class B product. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

2.2 Safety
Compliancy to Safety Norms is claimed in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms:
IEC 60950 (1993) +A1 +A2 +A3 + A4

2.3 Environmental constraints


Compliancy to Environmental Norms is claimed in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms:
ETS 300 019-1-2 1992, hazard level 1.2: Storage
ETS 300 019-1-1 1992, hazard level 2.2: Transportation
ETS 300 019-1-3 1992, hazard level 3.2: Climatic

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

23/259

SAFETY NORMS AND LEBELS

3.1 First aid for electric shock


Do not touch the victim with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the victim from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth-to-mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the victim has regained consciousness. It can also be employed
while the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons
present).
WARNING:
Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts.
Apply dry gauze on the burns.
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

24/259

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method


1

Lie the victim supine with his arms parallel with the body. If the victim is lying on an inclined
plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the victims mouth
and check that there are no extraneous objects in his mouth (dentures, chewing-gum etc.).

Kneel beside the victim level with his head. Put a hand under
the victims head and one under his neck (see fig.) Lift the
victims head and let it recline backwards as far as
possible

ED

Shift the hand from the victims neck to his chin: place your
thumb between his chin and his mouth, the index finger his
jawbone, and keep the other fingers closed together (see
fig.). While performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open.

With your thumb between the victims chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities (see fig.)

While performing these operations observe if the victims


chest rises (see fig.) If not, it is possible that his nose is
blocked: in that case open the victims mouth as much as
possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your
lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the victims chest heaves. This second method can be used
instead of the first while the victims nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were
holding his head with. The victims head must be kept
sloping backwards as much as possible.

Start with ten rapid exhalations; hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen exhalations per
minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has
determined his death.

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

25/259

3.2 Safety Rules


3.2.1

General rules

Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and maintenance functions
carefully read the relevant Handbooks and chapters.
Observe safety rules
While equipment is operating no one is allowed to have access to the equipment parts that
are protected by Cover Plate Shields that are removable with tools.
In the case of absolute need to have access to the equipment parts while it is operating. Only
service personnel are allowed such access. By service personnel or technical assistance it
means:
Personnel which have adequate technical knowledge and experience necessary to be aware
of the danger that they might face in carrying out an operation and of the necessary measure
to reduce or minimize the danger to themselves and to others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts. The Service Personnel
are not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts not specified is not prohibited.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors or hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which there are highly dangerous voltages present must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance, which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions etc. It is
recommended to use a slightly damp cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to
safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e.,
not exposing persons, animals, and things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power, switch off the power supply units as well as cut off the power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame).
Unless fitted into the equipment, an external protection device on power supply will be provided
in the building installation. The breaking capacity of the device will be adequate to the maximum
short circuit current which can flow.
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:

SAFETY RULES

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

26/259

3.2.2

Labels indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and
assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846-1984. The symbols or statements
are enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864-1984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT
INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WITH RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).

CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)

CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING


INFORMATION OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND
RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any
standard-known symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against
the most common dangers, specifically:
Dangerous electrical voltages
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heat-radiating mechanical parts
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
The symbols presented in para.3.2.3 through 3.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could be
present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this
handbook covers.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

27/259

3.2.3

Dangerous electrical voltages

3.2.3.1 Labeling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).

If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the
equipment will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:

WARNING!
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to mains
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.

3.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: Carefully observe the specific


procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where A.C.
or D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by -48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result
in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

28/259

3.2.4

Harmful optical signals

3.2.4.1 Labeling
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 825-1-1993
International Norms.

The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:

If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
LASER class
Power emitted
Wavelength
Ref. Norm
Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlocks

CAUTION
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

ED

01

LASER RADIATION

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW


DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT

P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

29/259

3.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules


When handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly
affixed and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.

DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: Invisible infrared radiations


emitted by the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damage. Carefully observe the specific
procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser
devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a)

Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be
seen, laser radiation may be present.

b)

Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

c)

Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no
laser radiation is present.

d)

All optical connectors, terminating either fibers or transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.

e)

Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable
by means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is
present. A magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.

f)

Never point a not terminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector at other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

g)

Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting
optical links between the transmitter and the receiver.

h)

Wearing of laser safety goggles or eye shields is recommended for every person working on
optical devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.

3.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data


Refer to para. 1.7.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

30/259

3.2.5

Risks of explosions

3.2.5.1 Labeling and safety instructions


This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is shown as the following label:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down
flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC-5641 Norm. A compliant label is affixed next to it
indicating that the openings must not be covered up.

3.2.6

Moving mechanical parts

3.2.6.1 Labeling and safety instructions


The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:

Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have
stopped.
3.2.7

Heat-radiating mechanical parts

3.2.7.1 Labeling and safety instructions


The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in
compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

31/259

As stated by IEC 60950 Norm, para.1.4.7, the touchable mechanical parts carrying the above
depicted warning label, are those whose temperature
following formula (temperatures in ):

exceeds the limits established by the

(T-Tamb) (Tmax + 25-Tmra)


Where:

T
Tamb
Tmax

Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.

Tmra

The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment


specification or 25, whichever is greater.

Ambient temperature during the test.


Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.

Table 7

IEC 950 -Table 16: Over-temperature limits, Part 2


Maximum over-temperature ()
Operator-accessible Parts
Glass,
Plastic,
Metal
Porcelain
Rubber
Handle knob, etc., held or touched
35
45
60
for short periods
Handles, knobs, etc., regularly held
30
40
50
Outer surface of the equipment that
45
55
70
can be touched
Inner surface of the equipment that
45
55
70
can be touched

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: Carefully observe the specific


procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heat-radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any
exposed part of your body.
3.2.8

Specific safety rules in this handbook

Specific safety rules are specified in the following paragraphs:


Para. 1.7.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

32/259

OTHER NORMS AND LABELS

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility


The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
Before starting any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
relevant Handbooks and chapters.
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility are distinguished inside this handbook by
the symbol and term:

ATTENTION

4.1.1

EMC NORMS

General norms - Installation

All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables should
use only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customers Installation Norms (or similar documents).
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated.
Install filters outside the equipment as required.
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper diameter and impedance.
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and degreased it.
Before inserting the shielded unit, proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact
springs and connection points, etc.).
Screws fasten the units to the shelf.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment, follow the instructions given.

4.1.2

General norms - Turn-on, Tests & Operation

Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility.


Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.).
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

33/259

4.1.3

General norms - Maintenance

Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.).
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screws fasten the units to the shelf.

4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)


Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced after having terminated the
maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. To address this concern the following
warning label has been affixed:

Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:

An elastic band worn around the wrist.


A coiled cord connected to the elastic band and to the stud on the shelf.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

34/259

4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions


Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
Title
(Caution to avoid equipment damage)
Statement

4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment


This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and
serial labels affixed to the equipment.
Labeling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Table 8
Ref. No.

Label references
Name of Label

Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N)

Serial number of item specified on catalogue

Final test certificate

SFP label

Simple label adhered on extraction handle

Label identifying compliancy with CE and WEEE Directives

Electrostatic label

On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.


Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual customer.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

35/259

1
3

Figure 1

ED

01

Labels for units with stiffening bar

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

36/259

3
Figure 2

Labels for units without stiffening bar

ANV + IC S P/N

Bar code of ANV + IC S P/N


Figure 3

Label identifying label on catalogue

Serial No.

Bar code of the serial No.


Figure 4

ED

01

Label specifying serial No.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

37/259

Figure 5

Labels on the SFP

A
01

21,5

28

0
3
5,5
6,5

C
B

Figure 6
Field
A
B
C

SFP label description

Field Name
Part number
Alcatel Code
Bar Code Alfa 39 (+*start, stop)

Figure 7

SFP label example

Figure 8

Figure 9

ED

01

CE label

WEEE label

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

38/259

Figure 10

Electrostatic label

Figure 11

ED

01

Labels on shelf

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

39/259

ED

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

ACO

Alarm Cut Off

A/D

Add and Drop functionality

BER

Bit Error Rate

B&W

Black and White

CD-ROM

Compact Disk Read Only Memory

Ch

Channel

CO

Centre Office

CPE

Customer Premise Equipment

CT

Craft Terminal

CWDM

Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex

DB

Database

DDM

Digital Diagnostic Monitoring

DMUX

Demultiplexing

EC

Equipment Controller

ECT

Equipment Craft Terminal

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility

EOL

End of Life

ESC-LC

Low Cost Equipment and Shelf Controller

ESD

Electrostatic Discharges

ETSI

European Telecommunication Standard Institute

E-SNCP

Electrical SubNetwork Connection Protection

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array

Gbit/s

Giga bit per second

HDBK

Handbook

HK

Housekeeping

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

40/259

ED

HW

Hardware

IEC

International Electro-technical Commission

IND

Indeterminate

IS-IS

Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System

I/O

Input/Output

ILOS

Input Loss of Signal

IP

Internet Protocol

ISO

International Standard Organization

ISPB

Intra Shelf Parallel Bus

ISSB

Intra Shelf Serial Bus

ITU-T

International Telecommunication Union -Telecommunication

LAN

Local Area Network

LAT

Lamp Test

LED

Light Emitting Diode

MAC

Medium Access Control

NE

Network Element

NES

Network Element Synthesis

OAD

Optical Add and Drop

OADM

Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer

OCH

Optical Channel

OCC10

10Gbps Optical Channel Card

OMDX

Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer

OMS

Optical Multiplex Section

OMSP

Optical Multiplex Section Protection

OS

Operation System

OSC

Optical Supervisory Channel

O-SNCP

Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection

PC

Personal Computer

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

41/259

ED

PCB

Printed Circuit Board

PDU

Power Distribution Unit

PSC

Power Supply Card

Q3

Interface with Protocol Q3

QECC

Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel

RECT

Remote Craft Terminal

RAM

Random Access Memory

RAI

Remote Alarm Interface card

RI

Remote Inventory

RX

Receiver

SC

Shelf Controller

SD

Shutdown

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SNCP

Sub-Network Connection Protection

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

SPI

Serial Peripheral Interface

TMN

Telecommunication Management Network

TRU

Top Rack Unit

TX

Transmitter

USM

User Service Manager

WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplex

WEEE

Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

WLA

Wavelength Adapter Board

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

42/259

GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION

6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation


A Product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A Product evolves through successive Product-releases which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain Product-release availability date.
Therefore, a Product-release defines a set of hardware components and a software package that, as
a whole, identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the
specific Product-release has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a Product-release has further development steps, named Versions, that are
developed to improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version,
or for bug correction purposes.
A Product-release has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed of one or more
handbooks.
A new Version of a Product-release may or may not produce a change in the status of the
Customer Documentation set, as described in para.6.4.

6.2 Handbook supply to Customers


Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.

6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation


Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always be meant as
plant-independent. Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to
commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent
documentation is not described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the
possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the
equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

43/259

6.4 Handbook Updating


The handbooks associated to with the Product-release are listed in para.1.3.
Each handbook is identified by:
The name of the Product-release (and Version when the handbook is applicable to the
versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones).
The handbook name
The handbook P/N
The handbook edition (usually first edition=01)
The handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the
date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
6.4.1

Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)

The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
Only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system resulting no change the technical contents of the handbook.
The edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents.
In this case:
The chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 5.
In affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text
and drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g.
from Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the
addition of a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). Version character can be used for draft or
proposal editions.
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks (or part of the handbook) relevant to software applications (typically the Operators
Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software Version distributed to customers implies
man-machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of
the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases Version
marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen
contents are unchanged.
6.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted
to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the new handbook
(supplying errata-corrige sheets are not envisaged).

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

44/259

6.4.2

Changes due to a new product-release

A new product-release change the handbook P/N and the edition start from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.

6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM


In the following CD-ROM means Customer Documentation on CD-ROM.
6.5.1

Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM

In most cases, a CD-ROM contains the documentation of one product-release (-version) in a certain
language.
In some other cases, the same CD-ROM can contain the documentation of different product-release
(-version) s in a certain language.
As a general rule:
CD-ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
The Installation Guides.
The documentation of system optional features that customers could not buy from Alcatel
together with the main applicative SW.
CD-ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain:
The documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks
related to racks that customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main
equipment).
The Installation and Turn-up & Commissioning handbooks.
A CD-ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them by
Interleaf-World-View-Press after the manual addition of some hyperlinks, which make the navigation
through the various handbooks easier. No additional information is added to each handbook; so that
the documentation present in the CD-ROMs is exactly the same the customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (Interleaf-World-View) is
added and a master CD-ROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus-free product.
After a complete functional check, the CD-ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of
the Production Department, so that the CD-ROM can be produced and delivered to customers.
6.5.2

Use of the CD-ROM

The CD-ROM can be used both in PC and Unix environments.


The minimum configuration for World View (rel.2.2.2) utilization on a PC is:
Operative System: Windows 2000
Processor: Pentium
RAM: 128Mbyte
Free disk space: 20Mbyte

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

45/259

The set-up procedure is present in the booklet included in the CD-ROM box.
After the set-up procedure, which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment, the customer is
allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools
included in the viewer, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
N.B.

Copyright notification

WorldView:

Alcatel documents:

6.5.3

Copyright 1981-1996
INTERLEAF Inc.
All rights reserved.
The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files contained
in the CD-ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel.
All rights reserved.
Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CD-ROMs
officially supplied by Alcatel, use and communication of its contents are not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

CD-ROM identification

Each CD-ROM is identified:


a)

By the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD-ROM
upper surface:
-

b)

6.5.4

The name of the Product-release(s) (and Version when the CD-ROM is applicable to.
The versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones).
A writing indicating the language(s)
The CD-ROM P/N
The CD-ROM edition (usually first edition=01)
And, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by
whose collection and processing the CD-ROM itself has been created.
CD-ROM updating

The list of source handbook/document P/Ns-editions indicated in section 6.5.3 point 2), in association
with the CD-ROMs own P/N-edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel-Information-System as a structured
list. Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive
system, the Alcatel-Information-System automatically raises a warning toward the Customer
Documentation Department, indicating the list of CD-ROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD-ROM. Updating of CD-ROMs
always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks composing the collection.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

46/259

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

47/259

DESCRIPTIONS

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

48/259

FUNCTIONAL DESIGN

The 1692MSE product release 3.2A is CWDM equipment intended for the METRO ACCESS, enterprise
and METRO CORE in the small cities. It is compliant with both ETSI and NEBS (level3) standards. It is
designed for a small number of channels (8 in this version) and for very low cost application, without
amplifiers.
The 1692MSE is organized from transponder cards to which the user accesses are connected to
optical Mux/Demux cards to perform the main CWDM signal (combined signal) and launch into the
fiber. The 1692MSE release 3.2A has been designed to offer the following functions:
Multiple configurations and multiple network architectures
The 1692MSE R3.2A can be configured as a line terminal, a back to back terminal, a CPE, an
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or Regenerator. These basic configurations cover
both point to point and ring network applications.
Multi-rate client signals
The 1692MSE R3.2A is equipped with multi-rate transponders. It supports both low bitrate signals
(from 125Mbps to 2.5Gbps) and high bitrate signals (9.95Gbps and 10.31Gbps).
Up to 8 optical channels in a single NE
There are up to 8 optical channels in a single NE. Each channel is associated to a CWDM
channel. The channels are 1470nm, 1490nm, 1510nm, 1530nm, 1550nm, 1570nm, 1590nm
and 1610nm.
N.B.

Normally, the central wavelengths of laser under normal temperature (25 degree C) are
1470nm, 1490nm, 1510nm, 1530nm, 1550nm, 1570nm, 1590nm and 1610nm.
Due to the specific technology of CWDM, no temperature control, the wavelength of system
under the whole temperature range (0-70 degree C) should be 1471nm, 1491nm, 1511nm,
1531nm, 1551nm, 1571nm, 1591nm and 1611nm with 7nm deviation.
Table 9
Frequency conversion of CWDM wavelengths
Wavelength (nm)
Frequency (THz)
1470
203.94
1490
201.20
1510
198.54
1530
195.94
1550
193.41
1570
190.95
1590
188.55
1610
186.21

Support up to four compact shelves or one CO shelf in a single NE


In 1692MSE R3.2A, a main shelf and up to three slave shelves or one CO shelf can be supported
in one NE.
Supervision
An extra channel at 1310nm, the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC), can be added to the
aggregate signal before being launched into the fiber.
Support unidirectional and Bi-directional transmission
Unidirectional transmission on single fiber is that 8 channels signal is transmitted in one direction,
while bi-directional transmission on single fiber are 4 channels in each direction.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

49/259

Client signals TDM concentration


Up to 4 client signals may be concentrated by Time Division Multiplexing, on a unique STM-16
transponder access, in order to optimize the use of each wavelength.
Protection
In unidirectional transmission, the 1692MSE R3.2A offers the Sub-Network Connection Protection
(SNCP) at the channel level and the Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP); while in
bi-directional transmission, only SNCP protection is offered.
Performance Monitoring
Monitoring of the performances of the client signals and the WDM transmission is available for
SDH and GbE frames.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

50/259

1.1 Basic equipment configurations


The 1692MSE R3.2A design, allows these basic configurations of the equipment:
Line Terminal
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
Regenerator
CPE
1.1.1

Line terminal

In line terminal configuration, the 1692MSE R3.2A connects client signals to an optical fiber CWDM
line.
In this configuration, the equipment takes place at both ends of point to point links.
Client signals
Up to 8 User channels

TPDs
MDX

Up to 8
CWDM signals

a Unidirectional transmission
Client signals

TPDs
MDX

CWDM signals

b Bi-directional transmission

Figure 12
1.1.2

1692MSE R3.2A in line terminal configuration

Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)

In OADM configuration, the 1692MSE R3.2A may add and drop a part of the traffic of an optical
CWDM line, in both directions. In this configuration the equipment takes the place of a linear add and
drop multiplexer in:
Point to point links
Ring networks

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

51/259

Client signals
x Add & drop
channels

West line
n (up to 8)
CWDM signal

East line

TPD

OAD

n-x express channels

OAD

n (up to 8)
CWDM signal

TPD
x Add & drop
channels
Client signals

a) Unidirectional transmission with x(x=1, 2 or 4) channels add & drop


Client signals
1 Add & drop
channel

1 Add & drop


channel

TPD

West line

OAD

OAD

East line

b) Bi-directional transmission

Figure 13
N.B.

1692MSE R3.2A in OADM configuration

In this document, the definition about East and West is as follows:


East: From west to east;
West: From east to west;
East is on the right side of pages, while West on the left side.

The OADM configuration, especially in ring network, allows the Sub-Network Connection Protection
(SNCP) of the added and dropped channels.
Particular Case: When all the CWDM line channels are added and dropped, the 1692MSE R3.2A is
a back to back terminal or a hub node. There is no pass through channel. SNCP may be performed
on all the CWDM line channels.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

52/259

Client signals
x Add & drop
channels

TPDs

West line
n(up to 8)
CWDM signal

East line
n(up to 8)
CWDM signal

Mux
Dmux

Mux
Dmux

Figure 14
1.1.3

TPDs

1692MSE R3.2A in back to back terminal configuration

Regenerator

In the regenerator configuration, the CWDM line signals can be regenerated.

Mux

Dmux
CWDM signals

CWDM signals

TPDs

Mux

Figure 15
1.1.4

Dmux

1692MSE R3.2A in regenerator configuration

CPE

For the CPE application, there are two different configurations: one-channel and two-channel CPE.
The OSC signal is used in both configurations.
O S C s ig n a l

1 o r 2 c lie n t
s ig n a l(s )

TPD

MDX

M ix e d s ig n a ls

O S C s ig n a l

Figure 16

ED

01

Block diagram of CPE

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

53/259

1.2 Network architectures


1.2.1

Ring networks

A two-fiber ring network is obtained with 1692MSE equipment in back to back terminal and OADM
configurations.
Client end traffic

B-TO-B

Client
Add & drop
traffic

OADM

OADM

Client
Add & drop
traffic

OADM

Client Add & drop traffic

Figure 17
1.2.2

1692MSE in ring networks

Point to point links

A point to point link, based on 1692MSE, is obtained with:


A 1692MSE in line terminal configuration at each end of the link.
Eventually, one or more 1692MSE in OADM configuration.

Client Add and Drop traffic


Client
end
traffic

Client
end
traffic

Line
terminal

OADM

Line
terminal

OADM

a) Unidirectional transmission
Client Add and Drop traffic
Client
end
traffic

Client
end
traffic

Line
terminal

OADM

Line
terminal

OADM

b) Bi-directional transmission
Figure 18

ED

01

1692MSE in point to point configuration

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

54/259

1.2.3

CPE configuration in ring network


Client end traffic

B-TO-B

Client
Add & drop
traffic

OADM

Client
Add & drop
traffic

OADM

OADM

Client
add
traffic

Client
drop
traffic
CPE

Client end traffic

Figure 19
1.2.4

1692MSE in ring networks with CPE

CPE configuration in point to point links


Client Add and Drop traffic
Client end traffic

Client
end
traffic

CPE

Line
terminal

OADM

OADM

Line
terminal

Client
end
traffic

Client end traffic

Figure 20

ED

01

1692MSE in point to point links with CPE

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

55/259

1.3 Network protection


Two protection levels can be provided. The first one is SNCP, and the other one is OMSP. SNCP can be
divided into E-SNCP and O-SNCP. See the following table to know the relationship between protection
and network application.
Table 10
Network

Point to point
Ring
Point to point

Relationship between protection and network application


Protection
Comments
Unidirectional application
OMSP and SNCP can be offered at the same time,
OMSP, E-SNCP or O-SNCP
but only one SNCP can be configured In one
OMSP, E-SNCP or O-SNCP
transponder.
Bi-directional application
Only one protection is available at one time In one
O-SNCP or E-SNCP
transponder.

1.4 Description of the functions


This section describes the main functions of 1692MSE.
1.4.1

Main function in different configuration

1.4.1.1

Terminal configuration

In line terminal configuration (unidirectional and bi-directional), these functions are the following:
Transponder
TDM concentrator
MUX
DMUX
Supervision management (in option)
OMSP (in option, only for unidirectional line terminal)
Equipment and shelf control
Power supply
CWDM
line

OSC
insertion

TDM
concentrator

Client
signals

MUX
OSC
extraction

Transponders

LEGEND:

OMSP

DMUX

To borads
Optical link

Supervision

Electrical link

OSC 1310nm

SPI bus

Optional
function

3.6V

Equipment and
shelf control

Function
or

To
borads

5.5V
48V

Power
supply

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management
application

Figure 21

ED

01

Functional synopsis in unidirectional Line Terminal configuration

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

56/259

OSC
insertion

TDM
concentrators

Client
signals

LEGEND:

CWDM
line

MUX

Transponders

OSC
extraction

To borads
Optical link

OSC 1310nm

Supervision
SPI bus

Electrical link

3.6V

Optional
function

Equipment and

To
borads

shelf control

Function
or

5.5V
48V

Power
supply

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management application

Figure 22
1.4.1.2

Functional synopsis in bi-directional Line Terminal configuration

OADM configuration

In line OADM configuration (unidirectional and bi-directional), these functions are the following:
Transponder
TDM concentrator
OADM
Supervision management (in option)
OMSP (in option, only for unidirectional line terminal)
Equipment and shelf control
Power supply
West: 1, 2 or 4
channels
Add & Drop

Client signals

East: 1, 2 or 4
channels
Add & Drop

TDM
concentrator
Transponders
CWDM
line
(west)

OSC
extraction

OMSP

CWDM
line
(East)

OSC
insertio
n

OSC
1310nm

Supervision

OMSP

OSC
extractio
n

Pass through
traffic

OSC
insertion

OSC
1310nm

LEGEND:
Optical link
Electrical link
Optional
function

To
borads

Function
or

SPI
bus

Equipment
and
shelf control

3.6V
To
borads

5.5V
48V

Power
supply

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management application

Figure 23

ED

01

Functional synopsis in unidirectional OADM configuration

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

57/259

N.B.
3, 5 or 7 channels OADM can be realized via the combination of 1, 2 or 4 channels
OADM.
Client signals

West: 1 channel
Add & Drop

East: 1 channel
Add & Drop

TDM
concentrator
Transponders

OSC
insertion

OSC
insertion

CWDM
line
(West)

CWDM
line
(East)
Pass through traffic

OSC
1310nm

OSC
1310nm

Supervision
OSC
extraction

LEGEND:

OSC
extraction

To borads

Optical link
Electrical link

SPI bus

Optional
function

3.6V

Equipment and
shelf control

Function
or

To
borads

5.5V
48V

Power
supply

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management application

Figure 24
1.4.1.3

Functional synopsis in bi-directional OADM configuration

Regenerator configuration

In line regenerator configuration, these functions are the following:


Transponder
MUX/DMUX or OADM
Supervision management (in option)
Equipment and shelf control
Power supply

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

58/259

OSC
extraction

OSC
insertion

DMUX
CWDM
line
(west)

MUX

T
P
D

OSC
insertion

OSC
extraction

CWDM
line
(East)

DMUX

MUX

OSC 1310nm

Supervision

OSC 1310nm

To borads
LEGEND:

SPI bus
Optical link

3.6V

Equipment and
shelf control

Electrical link
Optional
function

To
borads

Power
supply

5.5V
48V

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management application

Figure 25
N.B.

Functional synopsis in regenerator configuration (use MUX/DMUX)

Up to 8 channels can be regenerated per direction in this configuration.


OSC
extraction

OSC
insertion

DROP
CWDM
line
(west)

ADD

T
P
D

OSC
insertion

OSC
extraction

CWDM
line
(East)

DROP

ADD

OSC 1310nm

Supervision

OSC 1310nm

To borads
LEGEND:

SPI bus
Optical link
Electrical link
Optional
function

3.6V

Equipment and
shelf control

To
borads

5.5V
48V

Power
supply

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management application

Figure 26
N.B.

ED

Functional synopsis in regenerator configuration (use OADM)

Only up to 4 channels can be regenerated in per direction in this configuration.

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

59/259

1.4.1.4

CPE configuration

In the CPE configuration, these functions are the following:


Transponder
TDM concentrator
MUX/DMUX
Supervision management
Equipment and shelf control
Power supply
a)

One-channel CPE configuration


OSC
insertion

TDM
concentrator

Client
signal

OSC
extraction

CWDM
line

Transponders
LEGEND:
Optical link
Electrical link
Optional
function
Function
or

To borads

OSC 1310nm

Supervision

SPI bus

3.6V
To
borads

Equipment and
shelf control

5.5V
48V

Power
supply

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management application

Figure 27
b)

One-channel CPE configuration

Two-channel CPE configuration


OSC
insertion

TDM
concentrator

2 Client
signals

MUX

LEGEND:

CWDM
line

OSC
extraction

Transponders

DMUX

To borads

OSC 1310nm

Optical link
Electrical link
Optional
function
Function
or

Supervision

SPI bus

3.6V

Equipment and
shelf control

To
borads

5.5V
48V

Power
supply

Station
batteries

LAN

NE management application

Figure 28

ED

01

Two-channel CPE configuration

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

60/259

1.4.2

Description of the functions

1.4.2.1

Multi-rate transponder function

The transponder function is built with Wavelength Adapter Cards (WLA), one for two-client signal. The
role of this function is:
At the transmitting side (from client to CWDM line)
To adapt the client incoming optical signals to a dedicated wavelength and deliver those optical
signals to the multiplexer (MUX) function.
At the receiving side (from CWDM line to client)
To return the client optical signals from the signal delivered by the demultiplexer (DEMUX)
function.

Client Signals

User Tx

User Tx

User Rx

User Rx

8X8 Matrix

WDM Rx

WDM Rx

WDM Tx

From DMUX function


Figure 29

WDM Tx

To MUX function

Transponder function

The typical client signals accepted by the WLA of the 1692MSE are:
125 Mbit/s signal:
155.52 Mbit/s signal:
200 Mbit/s signal:
270 Mbit/s signal:
622.08 Mbit/s signal:
1.0625 Gbit/s signal:
1.25 Gbit/s signal:
1.24416Gbps:
2.125Gbps:
2.48832 Gbit/s signal:
2.5Gbps:

ED

01

Fast Ethernet / FDDI


STM-1 / OC-3
ESCON
Digital Video channel - HDTV
STM-4 / OC-12
Fiber channel / FICON
Gigabit Ethernet
OC-24
2 Fiber channel
STM-16 / OC-48
2 Gigabit Ethernet

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

61/259

2.66606 Gbit/s signal:

OC-48 (with FEC is 2666.06Mbps)

The 1692MSE supports up to 8 channels unidirectional transmission or 4-channel bi-direction


transmission on single fiber. The channels are 1470nm, 1490nm, 1510nm, 1530nm, 1550nm,
1570nm, 1590nm and 1610nm.
The transponder boards of the 1692MSE, also called Wavelength Adapter Cards (WLA), support two
channels each. 4 different WLAs are sufficient to cover the 8 channels.
1.4.2.2

TDM client signal concentrating (C-4xANY)

The aim of the C-4xANY TDM concentration is to save transponders and to optimize the use of each
WDM channel. Client signals from 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s can be concentrated in one STM-16. For
example, 4 STM-1 client signals can be concentrated on a unique STM-16 signal and applied on a
unique WDM channel.
1 Concentrator

C-4xANY
TDM
Concent

Up to 4
Client signals

Figure 30

1 WDM
Optical channel

TDM concentration function

The available client signal accesses and their maximum number are:
Low bit rate
4 x Fast Ethernet
4 x FDDI
4 x ESCON
4 x Digital Video
SDH

4 x STM-1
3 x STM-4

High bit rate


2 x Gigabit Ethernet
2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
The following mixes are also possible:
3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 1 x STM-4
2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 2 x STM-4
2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 1 x (FC or GbE or FICON)
1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 1 x STM-4 +1 x (FC or GbE or FICON)
2 x (FC or GbE or FICON)
Low bit rate and High bit rate signal is available at 1310nm and 850nm. SDH bit rate signal is only
available at 1310nm.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

62/259

1.4.2.3

Wavelength division multiplexing/demultiplexing

The optical multiplexer receives the colored optical channels signal from the transponders, and
multiplexes them into a fiber.
The optical demultiplexer receives the CWDM line signal; demultiplexes this signal and sends the
recovered optical channels signal to the transponders.
a)

Optical multiplexing

The multiplexer function may be obtained with the following 8:1 optical MUX:

Figure 31

CWDM MUX side

The multiplexer is able to multiplex 8 channel signals (in CWDM grid) issued from the transponder
function into one multi-wavelength single fiber transmission. This device is a 9 fibers passive optic
component: 8 channels add inputs, 1 output (common). The multiplexer can be used in a
unidirectional line terminal configuration.
Particular Case: The 8:1 multiplexer can also be used in a bi-directional line terminal configuration
to multiplex/demultiplex signals, see the following figure.

Add channels:
1...4

COM

Drop channels:
5...8

Figure 32
b)

8:1 MUX used as MUX/DMUX

Optical demultiplexing

The demultiplexer function may be obtained with the following 1:8 optical DMUX:

Figure 33

ED

01

CWDM DMUX side

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

63/259

The demultiplexer is able to demultiplex an input aggregate signal (n channels) into 8 channels
signals (in CWDM grid) and send to the transponder.
1.4.2.4

Optical add drop Multiplexing

In line OADM configuration, 1692MSE support unidirectional or bi-directional transmissions. 1 ch


add/drop, 2 ch add/drop or 4 ch add/drop; a OADM module can be used in a unidirectional
transmission, while only a 2 ch add/drop OADM module can be used in a bi-directional transmission.
a)

1 ch add/drop

The 1 ch add/drop OADM function may be obtained with the following scheme.
From West side

To East side

Demux

Mux

To West side

From East side

Mux

Demux

Ch x

Figure 34

Ch x

1 ch Add/drop function in unidirectional transmission

This scheme has been chosen to implement the extraction and the insertion of chX from and into the
WEST or EAST side of a CWDM protected network. In the figure only the OADM working on the WEST
side is shown.
b)

2 ch add/drop

The 2 ch add/drop OADM function may be obtained with the following scheme.
From West side
Demux

To West side
Mux

To East side
Mux

From East side


Demux

Ch x
Ch y

Figure 35

2 ch Add/drop function in unidirectional transmission

This scheme has been chosen to implement the extraction and the insertion of chX, Y from and into the
WEST or EAST side of a CWDM protected network. In the figure only the OADM working on the WEST
side is shown.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

64/259

Particular case: The 1 ch add/drop OADM function can also be used in bi-directional transmission
to add & drop 1 ch signal.

From / To West

Express

From / To East
Express

West Ch y

East Ch x

Figure 36
c)

1 ch add/drop function in bi-directional transmission

4 ch add/drop

The OADM is used to Add/drop four CWDM signals to/from a multi-wavelength signal on a single
fiber transmission.

4 ch Add/Drop Module
IN

CH4 filter

CH4
DROP

CH1
ADD

CH1 filter

CH3 filter

CH3
DROP

CH2
ADD

CH2 filter

CH2 filter

CH2
DROP

CH3
ADD

CH3 filter

CH1 filter

CH1
DROP

CH4
ADD

CH4 filter

EXP out

EXP in

Figure 37
1.4.2.5

OUT

4 ch add/drop function

1310nm circulator

The circulator is used to separate two reverse directional optical signals over 1310nm window.
The circulator function is the follow figure:

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

65/259

Port 1

Port 3

Port 2
Figure 38
1.4.2.6

1310nm circulator

1310nm broadband filter

This filter is used to add or drop 1310nm signal to or from 1310nm/1550nm mixed signal in
OADM/OMDX board of 1692MSE. The function is shown in the below figure:
1550nm Input

1310nm Input

Out

Figure 39
1.4.2.7

1310nm broadband filter

Optical parameters measurement (DDM)

The analogue parameters of SFP can be monitored through DDM function in SFP transceiver. It
includes Input Power, Input Power Type, Output Power, Bias Current, Power Supply Voltage,
Temperature and Calibration Mode.
In 1692MSE R3.2A, only DDM with External Calibration is supported.
1.4.2.8

Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC)

An optional channel named OSC is allocated to the transport of the supervision data.
WDM
terminal
M
U
X

D
M
U
X

D
M
U
X

OSC

OSC

M
U
X

OADM

Figure 40

01

WDM
terminal

OADM

OSC

ED

B-to-B
OADM

Optical supervisory channel management in line terminal and OADM configuration

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

66/259

The OSC allows the remote monitoring of the NE in a network.


1.4.2.9

Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP)

OMSP function performs optical multiplex section protection. On the transmitter side, with the optical
splitter, the signal from MUX output is broadcasted on the working fiber and protection fiber. On the
receiver side, the optical switch will select one of the optical signals coming from working fiber and
protection fiber under the control of board logic and send it into DEMUX. If a failure occurs on the
main path, the system switches on the signal of the spare path. The protection is non-revertive. In point
to point application, the optical multiplex section protection scheme is divided into the following two
sorts:

Mux

splitter

switch

Demux

Demux

switch

splitter

Mux

Figure 41

Mux

splitter

OMSP application without OADM

switch

splitter

switch

Demux

switch

splitter

Mux

OADM

Demux

switch

splitter

Figure 42
1.4.2.10

OMSP application with OADM

Sub-Network Connection Protection (with WLA)

In a ring network, the Sub-Network Connection Protection (SNCP) at optical channel level can be
provided either in Back to Back terminals or in OADM configuration.
The transponder cards (WLA) are duplicated for each protected channel. At the transmitting side, the
signal is broadcast on the two arms of the ring. At the receiving side one of the two available signals is
selected. If a failure occurs on the main path, the system switches on the signal of the spare path. The

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

67/259

protection is non-revertive.

Client end traffic

B-TO-B

Client
Add & drop
traffic

OADM

OADM

Client
Add & drop
traffic

OADM

Client Add & drop traffic


Figure 43 SNCP in a ring network
The Split & Select function is performed either E-SNCP or O-SNCP.
In case of E-SNCP, a matrix inside the transponders board ensures the split and selects the
function.

control
optical

electrical

LOS electrical
optical

optical
WDM Tx

WDM Rx

WDM

user Rx

user Tx

WDM Tx

WDM Rx

8x8
matrix

8x8
matrix
Figure 44

Electrical SNCP

In case of O-SNCP, two optical splitters ensure the function. The selection is done by switching-off

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

68/259

the user Tx corresponding to the failing path and re-activating the protecting one, the protection
is performed at transponder level.
control
optical

electrical

LOS

optical

user Rx

WDM Tx

user Rx

WDM Tx

electrical
optical

WDM Rx

user Tx

WDM Rx

user Tx

WDM

optical
splitter

optical
coupler

Figure 45
1.4.2.11

Optical SNCP

Broadcast Sub Network Connection Protection (with WLA3C)

B-SNCP is used to protect broadcasted service. B-SNCP +EPS (equipment protection switch) are used
together, which need two WLA3C boards. In each board three SFP modules are needed. Signal from
the WDM is input in CWDM port 1 and broadcast to user port 1 and two WDM ports. The routing is
done electrically in the 8x8 matrix.
In one board, a SFP module is placed in CWDM port 1 as main, a B/W placed in CWDM port 2 as
spare. These two transponders are said to be twins. The system implements protective actions
according to the alarms and status information of both CWDM ports. If a failure occurs on the main
path, the system switches on the signal of the spare path. The protection is non-revertive. Only the user
port 1 is needed, it can be placed CWDM or B/W modules.

CWDM 1

CWDM 2

CWDM 1

CWDM 2

Main
board
User 1

User 1

Figure 46
1.4.2.12

Spare
board

BSNCP+EPS using two WLA3C

Sub-Network Connection Protection (with C-4xANY)

In release 3.2A, C-4xANY with O-SNCP and E-SNCP are supported. In O-SNCP, there are two types:
Use a WLA with O-SNCP board and place a B/W SFP in C-4xANY board.
Use OMSP and place a colored SFP in C-4xANY board.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

69/259

In E-SNCP, only a WLA board can be used. In the meantime, place a B/W SFP in C-4xANY board.
See the following figures.

Drawer 1

Drawer 2
Mother
board

User
port 1

WDM
port 1

User
port 2

WDM
port 2

B\W SFP

Drawer 3

Drawer 4
C-4xANY

Figure 47

WLA-P

C-4xANY with O-SNCP (use WLA-P)

Drawer 1

Drawer 2
Mother
board

Color SFP

Drawer 3

Drawer 4

C-4xANY

Figure 48

OMSP

C-4xANY with O-SNCP (use OMSP)

Drawer 1
WDM
port 1

Drawer 2
Mother
board

B\W SFP

User
port 1

Drawer 3

WDM
port 2

Drawer 4
WLA

C-4xANY

Figure 49
1.4.2.13

C-4xANY with E-SNCP

16 channels upgrade

In 1692MSE R3.2A, the OSC port can be used either to transmit 1310nm OSC signal, or to interface
with another aggregated 8 channels CWDM signal. Then the transmission channels can reach up to
16 channels. This is achieved by introducing a new 1310nm broadband filter.
All types of C-MDX2/C-OAD2/C-MDX-B/C-OAD-B boards have been upgraded with 1310nm filter
in order to support 16 channels upgrade in future. Furthermore, the improvement applied on 1310nm

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

70/259

filter is also for compliance with ITU Recommendation G.694.2 version 2.2 for crosswalk issue. The
upgraded C-MDX2/C-OAD2/C-MDX-B/C-OAD-B is software independent.
1471
nm

1471
nm
1310nm filter

MUX
OAD

1310nm filter

DMX
OAD

OSC transmission

1611
nm

1611
nm

OSC TX: 1280~1335nm

OSC RX

1471
nm

1471
nm
1310nm filter

MUX
OAD

1310nm filter

1611
nm

Aggregated signal comprising


CWDM wavelengths in O&E band
(1271~1451nm)

Figure 50

ED

01

DMX
OAD
1611
nm

16CWDM
channels
transmission

Aggregated
signal

16 channels upgradable

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

71/259

1.5 Device description


1.5.1

Shelf list

In 1692MSE Release 3.2A, up to four compact shelves or one CO shelf are supported in one NE.
Slot 6

FAN

13

ESC-LC

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

PSC2

25

PSC2

446.2 mm

Slot 19

FAN

26

Slave I-LINK

Slot 18

24

Slot 17

23

Slot 16

22

Slot 15

21

Slot 14

20

PSC2

38

PSC2

Slot 32

FAN

39

Slave I-LINK

Slot 31

37

Slot 30

36

Slot 29

35

Slot 28

34

Slot 27

33

PSC2

51

PSC2

Slot 45

FAN

52

Slave I-LINK

Figure 51

ED

01

Slot 44

50

Slot 43

49

Slot 42

48

Slot 41

47

Slot 40

46

PSC2

Four compact shelves used in a NE (front view)

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

72/259

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

443mm

49

533.4mm

Figure 52
1.5.2

One CO shelf used in a NE (front view)

Shelf and boards designation and reference

Table 11
Shelf and boards designation and reference
Name
Mnemonic
1692 Metrospan Edge Compact Shelf / 2
1692 Metrospan Edge Compact Shelf / 3
1692 Metrospan Edge CO shelf
Optinex rack with TRU & Door
Optinex rack with TRU
Low Cost Equipment and Shelf Controller
ESC-LC
Local Access Network card
LAN-Q
Power Supply Card
PSC
Power Supply Card2
PSC2
Power Supply Card3
PSC3
Power Management Unit
PMU
Compact FAN / 2
FAN
CO FAN module
FAN-CO

ED

01

ALCATEL Code
3AL 97679 AA**
3AL 97679 AB**
3AL 86607 AA**
3AL 37952 AA**
3AN 44815 AA**
3AL 97690 AA**
3AL 86653 AA**
3AL 86652 AA**
3AL 86888 AA**
3AL 86652 AB**
3AL 86825 AA**
3AL 97682 AA**
3AL 86625 AA**

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

73/259

Housekeeping card
Rack Alarm Interface card
Intershelf Link Slave

HK
RAI
I-LINK-S

3AL 86668 AA**


3AL 87009 AA**
3AL 86808 AA**

Optical Multiplex Section Protection card


Optical Supervision card

OMSP
OSC

3AL 97541 AA**


3AL 97540 AA**

Wavelength Adaptor3 with PM


Wavelength Adapter3 with PM and O-SNCP

WLA3C
WLA3COP

3AL 97795 AA**


3AL 97795 AB**

OCC10-No Amplified Ch193.300 (1550)


OCC10-No Amplified Ch 193.000 (1550)
OCC10-No Amplified Ch193.100 (1550)
OCC10-No Amplified Ch193.200 (1550)
OCC10-No Amplified Ch195.900 (1530)
OCC10-Enhanced-CWDM (1530)
OCC10-Enhanced-CWDM (1550)

OCC10-NA-1550 (193.300)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.000)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.100)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.200)
OCC10-NA-1530 (195.900)
OCC10-EC-1530
OCC10-EC-1550

3AL 95313 AA**


3AL 95313 AB**
3AL 95313 AC**
3AL 95313 AD**
3AL 95314 AA**
8DG 81002 AA**
8DG 81002 AB**

2XGE
2XGE-FC

3AL 97800 AA**


3AL 97878 AA**

SFP transceiver L1.1 (1310nm) B&W


SFP transceiver 2M (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver S1.1 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver S1.1 (1310nm) B&W with DDM
SFP transceiver L1.2 (1310nm) B&W with DDM
SFP transceiver S16.1 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver S16.1 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver L16.1 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver L16.2 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver S4.1 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver S4.1 (1310nm) B&W with DDM
SFP transceiver L4.2 (1310nm) B&W with DDM
SFP transceiver I16 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver I16 (1310nm) B&W with DDM
SFP transceiver 1000Base-SX (850nm) B&W
SFP transceiver 1000Base-SX (850nm) B&W
with DDM
SFP transceiver 1000Base-LX (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver 1000Base-LX (1310nm) B&W
with DDM
SFP transceiver 1000Base-ZX (1550 nm) B&W
with DDM

L1.1
2M
S1.1
S1.1_DDM
L1.2_DDM
S16.1

1AB194670001
1AB194670004
1AB194670006
1AB196370001

S16.1_DDM

1AB196370006

L16.1

1AB196370004

L16.2

1AB196370003

S4.1
S4.1_DDM
L4.2_DDM
I16
I16_DDM
GbE_SX

1AB196360001
1AB196360004
1AB196360007
1AB196370002
1AB196370005
1AB187280002

GbE_SX_DDM

1AB187280033

GbE_LX

1AB187280001

GbE_LX_DDM

1AB187280031

SFP transceiver FC/2FC-SX (850nm) B&W with


DDM
SFP transceiver FC/2FC-LX (1310nm) B&W
with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1470nm)

ED

01

1AB194670002
1AB209860001

GbE_ZX_DDM

t.b.d

2FC SX_DDM

1AB187280037

2FC LX_DDM

1AB187280038

1470_Bronze

1AB196340001

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

74/259

CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN


receiver (1490nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1510nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1530nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1550nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1570nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1590nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1610nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1470nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1490nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1510nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1530nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1550nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1570nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1590nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1610nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1470nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1490nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1510nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1530nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1550nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1570nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1590nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1610nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1470nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1490nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1510nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1530nm) with DDM

ED

01

1490_Bronze

1AB196340002

1510_Bronze

1AB196340003

1530_Bronze

1AB196340004

1550_Bronze

1AB196340005

1570_Bronze

1AB196340006

1590_Bronze

1AB196340007

1610_Bronze

1AB196340008

1470_Silver

1AB196350001

1490_Silver

1AB196350002

1510_Silver

1AB196350003

1530_Silver

1AB196350004

1550_Silver

1AB196350005

1570_Silver

1AB196350006

1590_Silver

1AB196350007

1610_Silver

1AB196350008

1470_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340009

1490_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340010

1510_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340011

1530_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340012

1550_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340013

1570_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340014

1590_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340015

1610_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340016

1470_Silver_DDM

1AB196350026

1490_Silver_DDM

1AB196350027

1510_Silver_DDM

1AB196350028

1530_Silver_DDM

1AB196350029

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

75/259

CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with


receiver Standard (1550nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with
receiver Standard (1570nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with
receiver Standard (1590nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with
receiver Standard (1610nm) with DDM

APD

1550_Silver_DDM

1AB196350030

1570_Silver_DDM

1AB196350031

1590_Silver_DDM

1AB196350032

1610_Silver_DDM

1AB196350033

4xANY Host card


High speed 1310nm optical drawer
Low speed 1310nm optical drawer
High speed 850nm optical drawer
Low speed 850nm optical drawer
STM-1/4 optical drawer/2

C-4xANY
HF_1310 Drawer
LF_1310 Drawer
HF_850 Drawer
LF_850 Drawer
SDH_1310 Drawer

3AL 95063 AA**


3AL 86672 AA**
3AL 86674 AA**
3AL 86870 AA**
3AL 86869 AA**
3AL 95284 AA**

Unidirectional MUX/DEMUX without OSC filter


Unidirectional MUX/DEMUXE with OSC filter
Bi-directional MUX/DEMUX without OSC filter
Bi-directional MUX/DEMUX with OSC filter

C-MDX-U
C-MDX-E-U-S
C-MDX-B
C-MDX-B-S

3AL 97538 AB**


3AL 97769 AA**
3AL 97538 AC**
3AL 97538 AD**

Unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2 without OSC filter


Unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2E with OSC filter
1-channel unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2E with
OSC filter

C-MDX2-U
C-MDX2-E-U-S

3AL 97654 AA**


3AL 97772 AA**

C-MDX2-E-1-S

3AL 97772 BA**

2-channel unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2E with


OSC filter

C-MDX2-E-2-4749-S
C-MDX2-E-2-5153-S
C-MDX2-E-2-5557-S
C-MDX2-E-2-5961-S

3AL 97772 CA**


3AL 97772 CB**
3AL 97772 CC**
3AL 97772 CD**

1-channel unidirectional OADM without OSC


filter

C-OAD-U-1-4747
C-OAD-U-1-4949
C-OAD-U-1-5151
C-OAD-U-1-5353
C-OAD-U-1-5555
C-OAD-U-1-5757
C-OAD-U-1-5959
C-OAD-U-1-6161

3AL 97539 AB**


3AL 97539 AC**
3AL 97539 AD**
3AL 97539 AE**
3AL 97539 AF**
3AL 97539 AG**
3AL 97539 AH**
3AL 97539 AJ**

1-channel unidirectional OADME with OSC


filter

C-OAD-E-U-1-4747-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-4949-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5151-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5353-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5555-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5757-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5959-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-6161-S

3AL 97770 AA**


3AL 97770 AB**
3AL 97770 AC**
3AL 97770 AD**
3AL 97770 AE**
3AL 97770 AF**
3AL 97770 AG**
3AL 97770 AH**

C-OAD2-U-1-4747
C-OAD2-U-1-4949
C-OAD2-U-1-5151
C-OAD2-U-1-5353
C-OAD2-U-1-5555

3AL 97653 AA**


3AL 97653 AB**
3AL 97653 AC**
3AL 97653 AD**
3AL 97653 AE**

APD
APD
APD

1-channel unidirectional OADM2 without OSC


filter

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

76/259

C-OAD2-U-1-5757
C-OAD2-U-1-5959
C-OAD2-U-1-6161

3AL 97653 AF**


3AL 97653 AG**
3AL 97653 AH**

1-channel unidirectional OADM2E with OSC


filter

C-OAD2-E-U-1-4747-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-4949-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5151-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5353-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5555-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5757-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5959-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-6161-S

3AL 97771 AA**


3AL 97771 AB**
3AL 97771 AC**
3AL 97771 AD**
3AL 97771 AE**
3AL 97771 AF**
3AL 97771 AG**
3AL 97771 AH**

2-channel unidirectional OADM without OSC


filter

C-OAD-U-2-47474949
C-OAD-U-2-51515353
C-OAD-U-2-55555757
C-OAD-U-2-59596161

3AL 97539 PA**


3AL 97539 QA**
3AL 97539 RA**
3AL 97539 SA**

2-channel unidirectional OADME with OSC


filter

C-OAD-E-U-2-47474949-S
C-OAD-E-U-2-51515353-S
C-OAD-E-U-2-55555757-S
C-OAD-E-U-2-59596161-S

3AL 97770 BA**


3AL 97770 BB**
3AL 97770 BC**
3AL 97770 BD**

2-channel unidirectional OADM2 without OSC


filter

C-OAD2-U-2-47474949
C-OAD2-U-2-51515353
C-OAD2-U-2-55555757
C-OAD2-U-2-59596161

3AL 97653 BE**


3AL 97653 BF**
3AL 97653 BG**
3AL 97653 BH**

2-channel unidirectional OADM2E with OSC


filter

C-OAD2-E-U-2-47474949-S
C-OAD2-E-U-2-51515353-S
C-OAD2-E-U-2-55555757-S
C-OAD2-E-U-2-59596161-S

3AL 97771 BA**


3AL 97771 BB**
3AL 97771 BC**
3AL 97771 BD**

4-channel unidirectional OADM2 without OSC


filter

C-OAD2-U-4-47495153
C-OAD2-U-4-55575961

3AL 97653 CA**


3AL 97653 CC**

4-channel unidirectional OADM2E with OSC


filter

C-OAD2-E-U-4-47495153-S
C-OAD2-E-U-4-55575961-S

3AL 97771 CA**


3AL 97771 CB**

1-channel bi-directional OADM without OSC


filter

C-OAD-B-1-4755
C-OAD-B-1-4957
C-OAD-B-1-5159
C-OAD-B-1-5361

3AL 97539 FA**


3AL 97539 GA**
3AL 97539 HA**
3AL 97539 JA**

1-channel bi-directional OADM with OSC filter

C-OAD-B-1-4755-S
C-OAD-B-1-4957-S
C-OAD-B-1-5159-S
C-OAD-B-1-5361-S

3AL 97539 BA**


3AL 97539 CA**
3AL 97539 DA**
3AL 97539 EA**

N.B.
2XGE board and 2XGE-FC board have the same function. 2XGE with P/N 3AL97800AA**
only support DC48V, while 2XGE-FC with P/N 3AL97878AA** can support DC48/60V.
N.B.
PSC3 board is only used on CO shelf.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

77/259

1.5.3

Slot allocations

1.5.3.1

Slot allocations for compact shelf

The board composition and placement in a shelf has some constraints at the hardware, software and
functional levels.
In the 1692MSE release 3.2A, up to four compact shelves are supported in a NE. For Hardware
and/or Software organization, some boards are located on dedicated slots.
Mandatory boards are: ESC-LC, LAN-Q, PSC, PSC2 and FAN.
Table 12
Units
ESC-LC
MDX
OAD*
C-OAD2-4
WLA
OCC10
2XGE-FC
C-4xANY
OMSP
LAN-Q
PSC
PSC2
OSC
FAN
HK
RAI
Units
MDX
OAD*
C-OAD2-4
WLA
OCC10
2XGE-FC
C-4xANY
I-LINK-S
OMSP
PSC2
FAN
HK
*
**

1
x

Slot allocations for compact shelves in 1692MSE release 3.2A


Allowed unit types in master shelf
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
x
x

x
x

x
x

x
x

x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x

12

13

x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x

2
x
x

3
x
x

x
x
Allowed unit types in slave shelves
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x

11

12

13

x
x
x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x
x

x
X**

x
x
x

Except C-OAD2-U-4-XXXX and C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXX-S.


Due to the hardware limitation, the slot 9 in the third expansion shelf cant be provisioned when
PSC is used in master shelf. If PSC2 is used, there is no such constraint.

N.B.
The WLA includes WLA3C and WLA3COP. The OCC10 includes OCC10-NA and
OCC10-EC.
N.B.
The OAD includes C-OAD and C-OAD2. The MDX includes C-MDX and C-MDX2. The

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

78/259

C-OAD, C-OAD2, C-MDX and C-MDX2 respectively include many kinds of board according to
different wavelengths and other features.
N.B.
OSC cards can be placed in slots 9 or 11 of the master shelf. When the OSC board is
plugged in slot 9, the MDX/OAD board must be placed in slot 2. If only one OSC is used, slot 11 is
preferred.
N.B.
Only one HK board can be configured in a NE.
1.5.3.2

Slot allocations for CO shelf

In the 1692MSE release 3.2A, only one CO shelf is supported in a NE.


Mandatory boards are: ESC-LC, LAN-Q, PSC/PSC3 and FAN-CO.
Units
ESC-LC
MDX
OAD*
C-OAD2-4
WLA
OCC10
2XGE-FC
C-4xANY
MDX
OAD*
C-OAD2-4
WLA
OCC10
2XGE-FC
C-4xANY
PSC/PSC3
LAN-Q
OSC
OMSP
HK
RAI

Table 13
Slot allocations for CO shelf in 1692MSE release 3.2A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
x
x
x

12

13

x
x

x
x

x
x

x
x
x
x
24

35

36

37

x
x
x
x

PSC/PSC3
OSC
OMSP
FAN-CO
*

11

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

x
x

46

47

48
x

49

Except C-OAD2-U-4-XXXX and C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXX-S.

N.B.
The WLA includes WLA3C and WLA3COP. The OCC10 includes OCC10-NA and
OCC10-EC.
N.B.
The OAD includes C-OAD and C-OAD2. The MDX includes C-MDX and C-MDX2. The
C-OAD, C-OAD2, C-MDX and C-MDX2 respectively include many kinds of board according to
different wavelengths and other features.
N.B.
The OSC must host in slots 35 and 43. If the OSC is put in slot 35, slot 10 must be plugged
with MDX/OAD. If the OSC is put in slot 43, slot 18 must be plugged with MDX/OAD.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

79/259

1.6 System Configuration


1.6.1

Configuration criteria

The basic configuration of the 1692 MSE relies on the following criteria:
The network architecture and the position of the equipment in the network define the NE type (line
terminal, OADM, back to back terminal, regenerator or CPE).
Optical power budget limitations
Need for upgrading
Further need for the Optical Supervision Channel
The initial cost
Once the basic configuration is defined, secondary criteria will be determinant to define the optional
features:
TDM concentrator (C-4xANY)
Up to 4 client signals may be multiplexed on a single STM-16. The concentration of 4 client
signals on a unique CWDM channel requires a C-4xANY board but saves up to 3 CWDM
channels.
Optical Sub-Network Connection Protection (O-SNCP)
In ring networks, channels that carry important or priority traffic can be individually protected.
The protection of a channel requires a WLA3COP board.
Supervision function
The supervision feature requires an OSC board. The feature also requires the OSC insertion MUX
and the OSC extraction DMUX implemented in some OAD and MDX boards.
1.6.2

Terminal configuration

1.6.2.1

Unidirectional application

For release 3.2A product, a NE is composed of up to four compact shelves or one CO shelf. The
equipment can be configured as 3 typical terminals.
1.6.2.1.1

Only WLA

For multi-compact shelves application, the WLA/OCC10/2XGE-FC cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5
or 6 of master or slave shelves.
The C-MDX cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of master or slave shelves.
The OSC board (if needed) should be placed in slot 9 or slot 11 of master shelf.
The OMSP card is placed in slot 9 or 10 of master shelf or 9, 10 or 11 of slave shelves.
Following configuration is just an example.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

80/259

WLA3C

FAN

13

12

PSC2

WLA3C

Slot 5

11

(OSC)

WLA3C

Slot 4

10

WLA3C

Slot 3

(OMSP)

C-MDX-U/C-MDX-E-U-S

Slot 2

LAN-Q

Slot 1

PSC2

ESC-LC

(): Selectable
Figure 53
1.6.2.1.2

Slot 6

An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (only WLA)

Only C-4xANY

a) Using compact shelves


For release 3.2A products, when compact shelves are used, up to 8 C-4xANY boards can be
supported in one NE.
The C-4xANY cards are placed in slot [3,4] or [5,6] of master or slave shelf.
The C-MDX cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of master or slave shelves.
The OSC board (if needed) should be placed in slot 9 or slot 11 of master shelf.
The following configuration is just an example.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

81/259

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

(OSC)

C-4xANY
FAN
C-4xANY

10

Slot 3

C-MDX-U/C-MDX-E-U-S

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

PSC2

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

13

C-4xANY

FAN

C-4xANY

13

I-LINK-S

C-4xANY

FAN

C-4xANY

13

I-LINK-S

C-4xANY

FAN

C-4xANY

13

(): Selectable
Figure 54

Slot 4

I-LINK-S

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

PSC2

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

PSC2

An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (using compact shelves,


only C-4xANY)

b) Using CO shelf
For release 3.2A, when CO shelf is used, up to 8 C-4xANY can be supported in one NE.
Following configuration is just an example.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

82/259

ESCLC C-4xANY

PSC

LAN
Q

27

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

28

30

32

29

31

33

CMDX
-E-U
-S

11

12

13

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

22

23

24

34

OSC

36

37

38

40

42

44

46

47

PSC

39

41

43

45

FAN-CO

Figure 55

An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (using CO shelves, only


C-4xANY)

1.6.2.1.3

Mixing WLA and C-4xANY

Either compact shelves or CO shelves can be used to provide 8 unidirectional terminals. An


example with CO shelf is as follows:

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

83/259

ESC
-LC

WLA WLA
3C
3C

PSC

LAN
Q

27

28

29

CMDX
-E-U
-S

11

12

13

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

C-4xANY

22

23

24

30

31

32

33

34

OSC

36

37

38

40

42

44

46

47

PSC

39

41

43

45

FAN-CO

Figure 56
1.6.2.2

An example for slot allocations in unidirectional application (using CO shelves, mixed


WLA and C-4xANY)

Bi-directional terminal configuration

In this case, there are only 4 channels per direction available. When compact shelves are used:
The WLA/OCC10/2XGE-FC cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of master or slave shelves.
The C-MDX-B- (S) cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the master or slave shelves.
The OSC board (if needed) should be placed in slot 9 or slot 11 of the master shelf.
The OMSP cannot be used in the bi-directional configuration.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

84/259

WLA3C

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

(OSC)

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

C-MDX-B-(S)

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

WLA3C
FAN

13

Figure 57
1.6.3

Slot allocations in bi-directional application

OADM configuration

When compact shelves are used:


The WLA/OCC10/2XGE-FC cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of master or slave shelves.
The C-OAD cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of master or slave shelves.
The OSC board (if needed) should be placed in slot 9 or slot 11 of master shelf.
The OMSP card is placed in slot 9 or 10 of the master shelf or 9, 10 or 11 of slave shelves.
N.B.

C-OAD2-4 only can be placed [2,3] of the master or slave shelf.

1.6.3.1

1-channel OADM

Any wavelength among the eight CWDM wavelengths can be added and dropped. So, there are 8
types of 1-channel OADM modules according to the different wavelengths.

WLA3C

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

(OSC)

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S/C-OAD-U-1-XX

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

FAN

13

(): Selectable
Figure 58
1.6.3.2

An example for slot allocations in unidirectional OADM application (1 channel


add/drop)

2-channel OADM

In this case, only 2 channels per direction can be added and dropped. Depending on different
wavelength combinations, there are four kinds of OADM boards.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

85/259

Table 14
Wavelength combination for unidirectional application
Number
1
2
3
4
Channels (nm)
1470,1490
1510,1530
1550,1570
1590,1610

WLA3C

Slot 6

12

PSC2

WLA3C

Slot 5

11

(OSC)

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S/C-OAD-U-2-XXXX

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

FAN

13

(): Selectable
Figure 59
1.6.3.3

An example for slot allocations in unidirectional OADM application (2 channels


add/drop)

4-channel OADM

In this case, only 4 channels per direction can be added and dropped. Depending on different
wavelength combinations, there are two kinds of OADM boards.
Table 15
Number
Channels (nm)

FAN

Wavelength combination for unidirectional application


1
2
1470,1490,1510,1530
1550,1570,1590,1610

Slot 6

12

PSC2

WLA3C

Slot 5

11

(OSC)

WLA3C

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

LAN-Q

Slot 1

PSC2

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S/C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX
13

ESC-LC

WLA3C
WLA3C
FAN

13

(): Selectable
Figure 60

ED

01

I-LINK-S

PSC2

An example for slot allocations in unidirectional OADM application (4 channels


add/drop)

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

86/259

1.6.3.4

Bi-directional transmission in one fiber

In this case, only 1 channel per direction can be added and dropped. Depending on different
wavelength combinations, there are four kinds of OADM boards.
Table 16
Wavelength combination for a bi-directional application
Number
1
2
3
4
Channels (nm)
1470,1550
1490,1570
1510,1590
1530,1610

WLA3C

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

(OSC)

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

C-OAD-B-1-XX-S/C-OAD-B-1-XX

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

FAN

13

(): Selectable
Figure 61
1.6.4

An example for slot allocations in bi-directional OADM application

Regenerator configuration

As mentioned before, up to 8 channels can be regenerated in per direction in one NE when


MUX/DMUX is used; up to 4 channels can be regenerated in per direction in one NE when OADM is
used.
When compact shelves are used:
The WLA/2XGE-FC cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the master or slave shelves.
The C-4xANY cards are placed in slot [3,4] or [5,6] of the master or slave shelf.
The C-MDX-U/ C-MDX-E-U-S cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the master or slave shelf.
The C-OAD2-4 can be placed in slot [2,3] of the master or slave shelf.
The OSC board (if needed) should be placed in slot 9 or slot 11 of the master shelf.
1.6.4.1

Regenerator configuration (using MUX/DMUX)

In this configuration, three shelves are needed.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

87/259

FAN

13

Slot 6

12

PSC2

C-MDX-E-U-S

Slot 5

11

OSC

WLA3C

Slot 4

10

WLA3C

Slot 3

C-MDX-E-U-S

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

Slot 6

12

PSC2

WLA3C

Slot 5

11

WLA3C

Slot 4

10

WLA3C

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

PSC2

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

WLA3C

FAN

13

I-LINK-S

WLA3C
WLA3C
FAN

13

Figure 62
N.B.

PSC2

An example for slot allocations in regenerator applications (MUX/DMUX)

In above figure, set WLA3C remote loopback (loopback on line side).

1.6.4.2

ED

I-LINK-S

01

Regenerator configuration (using OADM)

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

88/259

FAN

Slot 6

12

PSC2

WLA3C

Slot 5

11

OSC

WLA3C

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

LAN-Q

Slot 1

PSC2

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S
13

ESC-LC

WLA3C
WLA3C
FAN

13

Figure 63
N.B.

I-LINK-S

PSC2

An example for slot allocations in regenerator application (OADM)

In above figure, set the WLA3C remote loopback (loopback on line side).

1.6.5

CPE configuration

There are two types of CPE, one-channel CPE and two-channel CPE. In both types only a master shelf
is needed.
1.6.5.1

One-channel CPE

When compact shelves are used:


The WLA/OCC10/2XGE-FC cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the master shelf.
The C-4xANY cards are placed in slot [3,4] or [5,6] of the master or slave shelf.
The C-MDX2-E-1-S cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the master shelf.
The OSC board should be placed in slot 9 or slot 11 of the master shelf.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

89/259

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

OSC

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

C-MDX2-E-1-S

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

WLA3C

FAN

13

Figure 64
1.6.5.2

An example for slot allocations in one-channel CPE application

Two-channel CPE

When compact shelves are used:


The WLA/OCC10/2XGE-FC cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the master shelf.
The C-4xANY cards are placed in slot [3,4] or [5,6] of the master or slave shelf.
The C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S cards are placed in slot 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the master shelf.
The OSC board should be placed in slot 9 or slot 11 of the master shelf.

Slot 6

12

PSC2

Slot 5

11

OSC

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S

Slot 2

LAN-Q

ESC-LC

Slot 1

PSC2

WLA3C

FAN

13

Figure 65

ED

01

An example for slot allocations in two-channel CPE application

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

90/259

1.7 Optical safety


1.7.1

General information

1.7.1.1

Hazard level

HAZARD LEVEL 1M, according to IEC 60825-1 (1998), and IEC 60825-2 (2000) requirements, can
be assigned to all ports of the system.
1.7.1.2

Location type

The equipment shall be installed in Restricted Location (industrial and commercial premises) or
controlled locations (optical cable ducts and switching centers).
1.7.1.3

Labeling

The labels reported below are applied during factory settings. The labels are affixed on all front covers
that protect optical connectors. They are on the front side plate of all the units involved in optical
transmission:
HAZARD symbol:

Example of EXPLANATORY label:

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

91/259

1.8 1692MSE System characteristics


1.8.1

Power supply

Two PSC or PSC2 cards are in charge of feeding the shelf.


Input power stage
The following figure shows the equipment input power stage housed on the two PSC/PSC2/PSC3. It
provides adaptation to the customer central power bus by a main power block and supplies all the
SPIDER FPGA by means of an on-board converter.
Distributed power stage
All the boards receive the +3.6 V and the 5.5 V voltages to power the SPIDER FPGA present on each
card. Moreover, some boards receive the +BATT BATT voltages generated by the input stage of the
PSC/PSC2/PSC3.
Normal service range
The normal input voltage range of the power supply module is either:
-36V-72V

Figure 66

ED

01

1692MSE input power stage (same as PSC2)

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

92/259

Normal service range


DC/DC Power supply units output voltages:

+ 3.6 V 3%
+ 5.5 V 3%

PSC/PSC2/PSC3 is used in 1692MSE system, slot 7 and slot 12. Its main purpose is to:
Supply and distribute -48/-60V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards in the shelf of the
1692MSE.
Supply and distribute 3V service voltage dedicated to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards.
Supply and distribute 5V auxiliary voltage.
Make a termination of ISPB bus, ISSB bus (GTLP Levels) and SPI bus (TX side).
Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss.
The PSC/PSC2/PSC3 boards work in 1 + 1 protection.
1.8.2

Equipment and shelf control

It is important to note that management is performed by SNMP protocol. The physical link is obtained
by ESC-LC EC/ESC-LC SC dialog through the ISSB Bus.
PDU/
TRU

SHELF

Power supply

PSC/
PSC2

PSC/
PSC2

Power supply

ESC-LC
EC

W
L
A

O
S
C

O
M
S
P

O
A
D

M
D
X

LAN

HK
SC

RAI

SNMP
HK
PDU/TRU

SPI--A
SPI--B

Figure 67
1.8.3

Equipment and shelf control

Management and monitoring interfaces

The 1692MSE also provides the management and monitoring functions:


Interface SNMP with a personal computer (ECT or RECT function) and 1353SH Network
Management System (on terminal)
Station alarms
Alarm status of the equipment and monitoring (indicated by the front cover LEDs)
Visual indications for the card failure.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

93/259

The 1692MSE supports the following interfaces:


SNMP:
Ethernet:
QECC:
Local/Remote:

For connection to Equipment Craft Terminal (ECT) or Remote Craft Terminal


(RECT)
For connection to OS 1353SH and other ALCATEL Nes with ETHERNET Interface
For connection to other WDM Nes
Craft Interface
RS232 9-pin D, PC compatible 38400 bit/s (Personal Computer)
Protocol Stack/Information Model messages
SNMP

Local and remote management interfaces functions


Alarms status checks, equipment, connection & TMN configurations, and maintenance memory for all
the equipment events.
Equipment software download (local and remote) on non-volatile memories without traffic
interruption.
Unit and equipment acknowledgement
Through Remote Inventory Company ID, Unit type. Unit part number, Software part number,
Manufacturing Plant, Data Identifier, Date.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

94/259

1.9 Environmental characteristics


The 1692MSE is designed to be compliant with both ETSI and ANSI standards.
The technical data of this chapter refers to ITU-T Recommendations, ETSI Standards or Telcordia
(former Bellcore) Standards.
1.9.1

ETSI compliancy

The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the pr ETS 300 386.
The following features are applicable:
Environmental class 1
Normal priority of service
Immunity
The following table specifies the valid tests and their compliance criteria for immunity. All the items
make reference to the chapters of the pr ETS 300 386.
Table 17
Valid tests and compliance criteria for immunity
Coupling
Test
Phenomenon
Test Level
(Port)
Method
Electrostatic
4 Kv (contact) / 4 Kv (air)
Discharge
6 Kv (contact) / 8 Kv (air)
DC power
500V
Electrical Fast Transients
500V
Signal
1KV
Radiated
3V/m
Electromagnetic Field
10 V/m
Continuous
DC power
3V
Conducted Signals
Signal
3V
NP:
LFS:

Compliance
Criterion
NP
LFS
NP
NP
LFS
NP
LFS
NP
NP

Normal performance within specified limits


Loss of function (self recovery)
No corruption of data management
Temporary loss of function following application of test
Self recovery to normal performance occurs at the cessation of the test

Emission
The following table specifies the requirements for the RF emissions of the equipment. All the items
make reference to the chapters of the pr ETS 300 386.
Phenomenon
Conducted emissions
Radiated emissions

Table 18
Requirements for RF emission
Coupling (Port)
Test Method
DC power
Signal
-

Maximum Level
Hazard level A
Hazard level A

The designation Hazard Level A is defined in the EN 55 022 document.


The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR-1089. The
recommendation related to immunity and the radiated emissions are located on 3-1 & 3-2.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

95/259

1.9.1.1

ANSI compliancy

The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR 1089 (see
note). The recommendation related to immunity and the radiated emissions is located section 3-1 &
3-2.
N.B.

GR 1089 CORE
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network
Telecommunication equipment issue 2, December 1997

1.9.2

Environmental constraints

The technical data for this chapter js, where it is possible, refers to ITU-T Recommendations or ETSI
Standards.
The system is designed for indoor operation with controlled air temperature. The complete
environmental conditions, including climatic, atmospheric and mechanical conditions, are specified in
the ETS 300 019. The following environmental hazard levels of this standard apply.
1.9.2.1

Storage

The equipment meets the following requirements involving Storage:


ETS 300 019-1-2: 1992, hazard level 1.2
Hazard level 1.2: weatherproofed, not temperature controlled storage location.
This hazard level applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control.
The location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed.
This hazard level applies to storage locations:
Where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They
may also be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors,
windows or other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to
icing. They may also be subjected to limited wind driven precipitation, including snow.
Where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur.
With normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban locations with industrial activities
scattered over the whole area, and/or with heavy traffic.
In areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas
With vibration of low significance and insignificant shock
The conditions of this hazard level may occur in:
Unattended buildings
Some entrances of buildings
Some garages and shacks

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

96/259

Table 19
Main Climatic Conditions

Value

Low air temperature

-25

High air temperature

55

Low relative humidity

10

High relative humidity

100

Low absolute humidity

G/m

0.5

High absolute humidity

G/m3

29

mm/Min

No

/Min

0.5

Low air pressure

kPa

70

High air pressure

kPa

106

W/m2

1120

m/s

30

Condition of condensation

Yes

Condition of precipitation

Yes, wind-driven precipitation

Condition of icing and frosting

Yes

Climatogram

2 (ETS 300 019-1-1)

Rain intensity
Rate of change of temperature

Solar radiation
Movement of the surrounding air

Figure 68

ED

Main climatic conditions


Unit

01

Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: no temperature controlled storage location

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

97/259

1.9.2.2

Transportation

The equipment meets the following requirements involving transportation:


ETS 300 019-1-1: 1992, hazard level 2.2 (Careful transportation)
This hazard level applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low
temperature and handling.
Hazard level 2.2 covers the condition of hazard level 2.1. In addition hazard level 2.2 includes
transportation in all types of trucks and trailers in areas with a well-developed road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed with shock-reducing buffers.
Manual loading and unloading of up to 20 Kg is included.
Table 20
Main climatic conditions
Environmental Parameter

Unit

Value

Low air temperature

-25

High air temperature, air in unventilated enclosures

70

High air temperature, air in ventilated enclosures or outdoor air

40

Relative humidity

95
3

Absolute humidity

g/m

60

Low air pressure

kPa

70

Movement of the surrounding air

m/s

20

Rain intensity
Solar radiation
Heat radiation
Condition of condensation

1.9.2.3

mm/Min

W/m

1120

W/m

600

Yes

Climatic conditions for operating

The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. The functionality of the Equipment, in relation to
Temperature, is in compliance with:
ETS 300 019-1-3: 1992, hazard level 3.2
Hazard level 3.2: Partlial temperature-controlled locations.
This hazard level applies to locations:
Where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open
windows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitation:
Where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur.
With normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban locations with industrial activities
scattered over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic.
In close proximity to sources of sand or dust.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

98/259

With vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures
subjected to negligible vibrations.
The conditions of this hazard level may be found in:
Entrances and staircases of buildings
Garages
Cellars
Certain workshops
Buildings in factories and industrial process plants
Unattended equipment stations
Certain telecommunication buildings
Ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings

Figure 69

ED

01

Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

99/259

Table 21
Main climatic conditions
Environmental Parameter
Unit
Low air temperature

Value
-5

High air temperature

45

Low relative humidity

High relative humidity

95
3

G/m

29

/Min

0.5

Low air pressure

kPa

70

High air pressure

kPa

Low absolute humidity

G/m

High absolute humidity


Rate of change of temperature

Solar radiation
Heat radiation
Movement of the surrounding air

106

W/m

700

W/m

600

m/s

Condition of condensation

Yes

Condition of wind-driven rain, snow

No

Condition of icing

Yes

Climatogram
1.9.2.4

2 (ETS 300 019-1-3)

Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

The marking
printed on the subrack denotes compliancy with the Directive 2002/96/EC on
Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
The general principle is the producer responsibility in the management of the products he puts on the
market when discarded by the owner. The producer responsibility now covers the end of life of the
products sold.
The European directive is effective in a country once transposed. The starting date for the producer
responsibility for the European text is 13th August 2005.
All Alcatel products fall under in Category 3 of Annex 1A of the WEEE directive (Directive 2002/96/
EC). I.e. IT and Telecommunication equipment under item Other products transmitting sound,
images or other information by telecommunications.
Alcatel products fall under WEEE directive name: Other product or equipment of transmitting
sound, images or other information by telecommunications in Annex 1B.
This mark will not cause any responsibility as all responsibilities will be defined by contract.
1.9.2.5

Acoustical noise

The acoustical noise level of the product complies with:


ETS 300 753 Environmental Class 3.1 for attended telecommunication equipment rooms
(maximum sound level 7.2 bels).

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

100/259

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

In 1692MSE release 3.2A, compact shelves or CO shelf can be used in a NE. A fully loaded 1692MSE
system can be housed in a single standard ETSI or ANSI rack (compact shelf can also be placed on the
desk).

2.1 Rack design


The 1692MSE mechanical design allows to put up to four CO shelves or up to 12 compact shelves in a
single rack. It is compatible with the following mechanical standards:
A 2000 mm high ETSI rack
A 2150 mm high ANSI rack
A 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack

Figure 70

ED

01

Rack description

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

101/259

2.2 CO shelf
Only one CO shelf can be managed in a 1692MSE NE.
2.2.1

Shelf organization

The CO shelf is divided into 49 board or unit slots, grouped in three parts:
The main part, which is the upper part and which comprises the slots from 1 to 24.
The first extension part, which is the middle part and which comprises the slots from 25 to 48.
The second extension part, which is the bottom part and which comprises the slot 49.

Figure 71

Figure 72

ED

01

Shelf organization

Shelf front view with cover

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

102/259

2.2.2

Shelf dimensions

Figure 73

Shelf dimensions

2.3 Compact shelf


The 1692MSE shelf is Compact WDM architecture. The following is the mechanical photo for single
shelf (main or slave).

The operator must wear a wrist-strap bracelet connected to the mechanical ground (available on
the rear of the shelf) for each handling a board, optical connectors or a part of the shelf.
Figure 74

1692MSE single shelf

Main features provided by the 1692MSE shelf:

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

103/259

It is very easy to use due its small size.


Up to 12 shelves can be set in a 2000 mm high ETSI rack, or a 2150 mm high ANSI rack, or
1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.
It can be placed on the outside of rack, such as on the desk.
N.B.
2.3.1

For compact shelf, the front cover can not be installed when the slave shelves are used.
Shelf organization

The 1692MSE single compact shelf is divided into 13 board or unit slots, grouped in three parts:
The main part comprises the slots from 1 to 6 used for the main boards.
The right side part comprises the slots from 7 to 12 used for the small boards.
The left side part comprises the slot 13 available for the FAN board.

Second extension part (slot 13)

First extension part (slot 7 to 12)


Main part (slot 1 to 6)

Figure 75
2.3.2

1692 MSE compact shelf mechanical structure

Shelf dimensions

Shelf size:
The size of the 1692 MSE shelf is 446.2 (width) x 274mm (depth with cover) x 132.4 mm (height).
The depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitation in ANSI rack).

132.4 mm

On the Release 3.2A, up to four compact shelves can be is managed in one NE. The dimension for the
four shelves is the same. See the following figure.

FAN

13

ESC-LC

Slot 6

12 PSC2

Slot 5

11

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Slot 2

8 LAN-Q

Slot 1

PSC2

446.2mm

Figure 76

ED

01

Shelf dimension and shelf partitioning

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

104/259

2.4 Unit front view

Figure 77

Figure 78

01

LAN-Q board front view

Figure 79

PSC2 board front view

Figure 80

FAN board front view

Figure 81

ED

ESC-LC front view

FAN-CO board example

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

105/259

Figure 82

Figure 83

OMSP board front view

Figure 84

WLA3C board front view

Figure 85

WLA3COP board front view

Figure 86

OCC10-NA board front view

Figure 87

Figure 88

Figure 89

C-OAD2-E-U-4-55575961-S board front view

Figure 91

01

2XGE-FC board front view

C-OAD-E-U-1-6161-S board front view

Figure 90

ED

OSC board front view

C-MDX-E-U-S board front view

C-4xANY board front view

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

106/259

Figure 92

HK board front view

Figure 93

RAI board front view

Figure 94

ED

01

I-LINK-S board front view

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

107/259

2.5 Power consumption and weight


2.5.1

Maximum power consumption and weight of the boards and units

Table 22
Maximum power consumption of the units
Unit
Maximum Power Consumption (W) Weight Indication (kg)
ESC-LC
10
0.85
LAN-Q
2.4
0.13
PSC
0.4 + Psec (*)
0.28
PSC2
1.4
0.30
FAN
14
0.33
FAN-CO
20
2.1 (Fan module +filter)
WLA3C/WLA3COP
19.7
0.73/0.74
OCC10-NA
22.65
0.97
OCC10-EC
20.9 (with XFP)
0.87 (without XFP)
2XGE-FC
21.5
0.91
OSC
4
0.2
OMSP
4
0.3
HK
2.5
0.13
RAI
2
0.12
OAD/MDX
3
1.2
I-LINK-S
2.8
0.6
C-4xANY without drawers
20
1.25
C-4xANY with 4 drawers
32
1.65
Drawer
3(each)
0.1(each)
(*) For each PSC board, Psec = 1/2_(Pshelf 5V + Pshelf 3.3V)_(1-0.85).
Pshelf 5V is the power consumption of the 5V feed,
Pshelf 3.3V is the power consumption of the 3.3V.
2.5.2

Maximum power consumption of the equipment

The following table gives an estimation of maximum power consumption of the 1692MSE for different
typical configuration (just for examples).
Table 23
Estimated maximum power consumption of the equipment
Item
Number of Units
Power Dissipation Per Item (w)
Configuration 1: 8 lambda with WLA3C in one compact shelf
ESC-LC
1
10
LAN-Q
1
2.4
FAN
1
14
PSC2
2
1.4
C-MDX2-E-U-S
1
3
WLA3C
4
19.7
OSC
1
4
OMSP
1
4
Total Power Consumption
119W
Configuration 2: 8 lambda with mixed 4xANY cards with 4 cartridges and WLA3C in CO shelf
ESC-LC
1
10
LAN-Q
1
2.4
FAN-CO
1
20
PSC
2
0.4 + Psec
C-MDX2-E-U-S
1
3

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

108/259

C-4xANY
WLA3C
OSC
OMSP
Total Power Consumption

2
3
1
1

32
19.7
4
4
171.5W

2.6 FIT of 1692 MSE


The following table lists the FIT of some units used in 1692MSE.
Table 24
FIT of 1692 MSE
Unit
FIT
Unit
FIT
Unit
L1.1
351
C-4xANY
5868
C-OAD2-E-U-1-XX-S
L1.2_DDM
356
HF_1310
1350
C-OAD-U-2-XXXX
L4.2_DDM
356
SDH_1310
1050
C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S
2M
107
LF_1310
1070
C-OAD2-U-2-XXXX
S1.1*
232
HF_850
800
C-OAD2-E-U-2-XXXX-S
S16.1*
351
LF_850
528
C-OAD2-U-4-XXXX
L16.1
351
WLA3C
2291
C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXX-S
L16.2
356
WLA3COP
2306
C-OAD-B-1-XX
S4.1*
232
OCC10-EC
2502
C-OAD-B-1-XX-S
I16*
107
2XGE-FC
2292
ESC-LC
GbE_SX*
61
C-MDX-U
387
LAN-Q
GbE_LX*
107
C-MDX-E-U-S
427
PSC
GbE_ZX_DDM
356
C-MDX-B
299
PSC2
2FC SX_DDM
75
C-MDX-B-S
343
HK
2FC LX_DDM
75
C-MDX2-U
480
RAI
PIN*
313
C-MDX2-E-U-S
510
I-LINK-S
APD*
275
C-MDX2-E-1-S
325
OMSP
XFP
754
C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S
375
OSC
C-OAD-U-1-XX
262
FAN-CO
C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S
342
FAN
C-OAD2-U-1-XX
406
*
It includes two types of SFPs: with or without DDM function.
N.B.
N.B.
N.B.

FIT
491
307
387
456
537
547
627
257
350
3219
1050
1300
1320
1500
1100
1170
500
449
6504
2166
-

The FIT of WLA only includes one channel in the WLA board, but the one of WLA-P includes
both channels of the board.
The above FIT values are deduced from the corresponding MTBF values.
4 main contribution are not taken into account in the FIT calculation:

1) Mechanical damage
These failures could be caused for example by poor handling, wrong packaging or incorrect
transportation.
2) Problems of diagnostic leading to NFF (No Failure Found) A certain number or units returned to
Alcatel have been declared in failure after an error of diagnostic. These units are not in failure and are
declared NFF after the reparation process. From our experience of major networks, this NFF rate is
generally around 20% of returns. A higher NFF rate would mean that the diagnostic process has to be
revised.
3) FIT values do not apply to Installation/Commissioning failures and to the first months of the
network operation.During this period, failures (reported as Early Life Failures or Infant Mortality)

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

109/259

happen at higher rates than calculated FITs, due either to incorrect installation or to the presence of
weak components. It is reasonable to assume that during the first 6 months of operation, the observed
failure rate can be up to twice the predicted value
4) FITs do not take into account punctual defects that cannot be predicted, like a wrong component
lot/batch coming from our suppliers manufacturing process.

2.7 Equipment connections


The external connections of the 1692MSE may be divided into the following categories:
Optical
Management
Power supply
2.7.1

Optical connections

In 1692MSE, two kinds of optical connectors are used: LC and MU.


Table 25
Unit
WLA/2XGE-FC
OSC
MDX/OAD
OMSP
OCC10-NA
OCC10-EC
a)

b)

c)

ED

Optical connections in 1692MSE


LC
MU

Direction
Inclined
Straight
Inclined
Straight
Inclined
Inclined

WLA/2XGE-FC board

Figure 95

LC optical connectors

Figure 96

LC optical connectors

OSC board

OMSP board

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

110/259

d)

e)

ED

Figure 97

MU optical connectors

Figure 98

MU optical connectors

Figure 99

MU optical connectors

OAD and MDX board

OCC10-NA board

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

111/259

2.7.2

Management connections

2.7.2.1

Housekeeping

The housekeeping alarm signals are available on the front panel connector of the HK board. It is a 25
pin SUB-D Female connector.
Table 26
Number

Name

Common out

Common Output

OUT1

Output

OUT2

Output

OUT3

Output

OUT4

Output

OUT9_1

Output

OUT9_2

Output

OUT9_3

Output

IN1

Input

10

IN2

Input

11

IN3

Input

12

IN4

Input

13

GNDP

Input Signal Ground

14

Common out

Common Output

15

OUT8

Output

16

OUT7

Output

17

OUT6

Output

18

OUT5

Output

19

IN9_1

Input

20

IN9_2

Input

21

IN8

Input

22

IN7

Input

23

IN6

Input

24

IN5

Input

25

GNDP

Input Signal Ground

26

GNDM

Mechanical Ground

27

GNDM

Mechanical Ground

N.B.

ED

Connector access
Description

Connector

The 25 pin SUB-D connector is connected to GNDM through the 2 screw holes called pin 26
and pin 27.

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

112/259

2.7.2.2

Rack Alarm Interfaces

The rack alarm interface signals are available on the two front panel connectors of the RAI board. The
two interfaces are:
A 9 pins SUB-D female connector, which provides the interface between the master shelf and the
TRU (or PDU).
A 6 pins connector, which provides the interface between two shelves.
Master shelf - TRU interface
Table 27

Pins SUB-D connect access


Description

Number

Name

CRI _AL_UP

GNDP

MAJ_AL_UP

RACK_AL_UP

Rack (or Up) Alarm Output

MIN_AL_UP

Minor (or Non-Urgent) Alarm Output

AL_IN_COM

Common Outputs

PRM_AL_UP

Primary Alarm Input

SEC_AL_UP

Secondary Alarm Input

FAN-AL_UP

Fan Alarm Input

Connector

Critical (or Urgent) Alarm Output


Common Inputs
Major (or Non-Urgent) Alarm Output

Master shelf - shelf interface


Table 28

ED

Number

Name

Pins RJ11 connector access


Description

CRI_AL_DOWN

Critical (or Urgent) Alarm Input

MAJ_AL_DOWN

Major (or Non-Urgent) Alarm Input

RACK_AL_DOWN

Rack (or Up) Alarm Input

MIN_AL_DOWN

Minor (or Non-Urgent) Alarm Input

AL_IN_COM

Common Inputs

AL_IN_COM

Common Inputs

01

Connector

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

113/259

2.7.2.3

LAN accesses

The LAN-Q board can be accessed by the RJ-45 connector on its front panel.
Number
1

Table 29
Name
RX-P

RJ 45 connector access
Description
Reception-Positive

RX-N

Reception-Negative

TX-P

Transmission-Positive

Not Used

Not Used

TX-N

Transmission-Negative

Not Used

Not Used

2.7.2.4

Connector

F interface

At the ESC-LC front panel, a 9-pin SUB-D female connector provides an access to an F interface. It
allows connection to a Craft Terminal.
Number
1

Name
F_DCD

Table 30

Connector access
Description
F_DATA Carrier Detect

F_RXD

F_Received Data

F_TXD

F_Transmitted Data

F_DTR

F_Data Terminal Ready

GND

Signal Ground

F_DSR

F_Data Set Ready

F_RTS

F_Request To Send

F_CTS

F_Clear To Send

Not Used

2.7.2.5

Connector

DBG interface connector

The 8-pin RJ45 connector on the front-panel of the ESC-LC board gives an access to the DBG
interface.
Table 31

ED

Connector access
Description
-

Number
1

Name
Not Used

Not Used

D_TXD

SC/EC DBG_Transmit Data

Not Used

D_RXD

SC/EC DBG_Receive Data

Not Used

D_DTR

SC/EC DBG_Data Terminal Ready

GND

Ground

01

Connector

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

114/259

2.7.2.6

RS485 connector

There are three RS485 connectors (I-LINK interface) on the front panel of the ESC-LC board and one
connector on the front panel of the I-LINK-S board.
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2.7.3

Table 32
Name
SPI_MODE_SLAVE_DP
SPI_CLK_SLAVE_DP
SPI_TXD_SLAVE_DP
SPI_RXD_SLAVE_DP
CARD_PRES_SLAVE_DP
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
SPI_MODE_SLAVE_DN
SPI_CLK_SLAVE_DN
SPI_TXD_SLAVE_DN
SPI_RXD_SLAVE_DN
CARD_PRES_SLAVE_DN
ID4
ID5

Connector access
Description
SPI_MODE Positive
SPI_CLK Positive
SPI_TXD Positive
SPI_RXD Positive
CARD_PRES Positive
SPI_MODE Negative
SPI_CLK Negative
SPI_TXD Negative
SPI_RXD Negative
CARD_PRES Negative
Slot ID4
Slot ID5

Connector

Power supply connections

The power supply voltage is distributed to the shelves on a 3 pin SUB-D connector, on the front panel
of each PSC/PSC2/PSC3.
Table 33
Number

ED

01

Power supply 1 and 2: connector access


Name
Connector

1 (Male)

+ PVBATT

2 (Female)

GND

3 (Male)

- NVBATT

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

115/259

UNITS DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the cards and units of the 1692MSE Release 3.2A. It provides for each card:
Functional diagram and description
Interface definitions
Front panel description

3.1 Wavelength Adapter


There are 2 kinds of wavelength adapters in this release:
WLA3C:
WLA3COP:

WLA3 without O-SNCP


WLA3 with O-SNCP

SDH and GbE


performance monitoring

8X8

MATRIX

CWDM
Tx

CWDM
Output

CWDM
Rx

CWDM
Input

User
Input

BW Rx

User
Output

BW Tx

User
Input

BW Rx

CWDM
Tx

User
Output

BW Tx

CWDM
Rx

CWDM
Output

CWDM
Input

Alarm&Control
Unit

Figure 100 Block diagram of WLA3C boards

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

116/259

SDH and GbE


performance monitoring

User
Input

CWDM
Tx

CWDM
Output

BW Tx

CWDM
Rx

CWDM
Input

BW Rx

CWDM
Tx

CWDM
Output

BW Tx

CWDM
Rx

CWDM
Input

BW Rx

User
Output

User
Input

User
Output

8X8
MATRIX

User Input

O-SNCP
module

Alarm&Control
Unit

User Output

Figure 101 Block diagram of WLA3COP boards


3.1.1

Description

The WLA unit is a bidirectional multi-rate interface. The block-diagrams are shown on the above
figures.
The electrical matrix provides some flexibility and additives features:
Add and Drop
Client (local) loopback
Line (remote) loopback
Local-Remote loopback
E-SNCP

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

117/259

The alarm and control unit ensures the following functions:


Matrix management interface
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management
Alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller
Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if an Optical-SNCP
(O-SNCP): user Tx ON/OFF control
Optical module information collection
Performance monitoring result collection
The SDH and GbE performance-monitoring units complete the following functions:
SDH B1 performance monitoring
SDH J0 performance monitoring
Gigabit Ethernet performance monitoring
3.1.2

Optical interfaces

3.1.2.1

B&W module

The optical performances for the SFP transceivers are as follows. In this release, these SFP transceivers
can be used in the user side and line side of WLA board:
Table 34

Optical parameters for SFP transceivers used in the user side


Output
Sensitivity
Overload
Fiber type
(dBm,EOL)
(dBm,EOL)
(dBm,EOL)
-15~-8
-29
-8
9/125m SMF

Item
S1.1
S4.1

-15~-8

-29

-8

9/125m SMF

S16.1

-5~0

-19

9/125m SMF

I16

-10~-3

-19

-3

9/125m SMF

L16.1

-2~+2

-28

-8

9/125m SMF

L16.2

-2~+2

-29

-8

9/125m SMF

GbE_SX

-9.5~-4

-18

50/62.5/125m MMF

GbE_LX

-11~-3

-20

-3

9/125m SMF

S1.1_DDM

-15~-8

-29

-8

9/125m SMF

L1.2_DDM

-5~0

-34

-10

9/125m SMF

S4.1_DDM

-15~-8

-29

-8

9/125m SMF

L4.2_DDM

-3~+2

-28

-8

9/125m SMF

I16_DDM

-10~-3

-19

-3

9/125m SMF

S16.1_DDM

-5~0

-19

9/125m SMF

GbE_SX_DDM

-9.5~-4

-18

50/62.5/125m MMF

GbE_LX_DDM

-11~-3

-20

-3

9/125m SMF

GbE_ZX_DDM

0~+5

-24

9/125m SMF

2FC_SX_DDM

-10~-3

2FC: -16; FC: -18

50/62.5/125m MMF

2FC_LX_DDM

-9.5~-3

-21

-3

9/125m SMF

3.1.2.2

Colored modules

In this release, there are 2 kinds of colored SFP that can be selected to meet the requirement of each
application. They are SILVER, BRONZE SFPs.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

118/259

The two modules are:


SFP with PIN receiver, for distances up to 40 Km, an operating bitrate from 125Mbps to 2.7Gbps
(called hereafter the BRONZE version).
Standard SFP with APD receiver, for distances up to 70 Km, an operating bitrate from 125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps (called hereafter the SILVER version).
Table 35
Optical parameters for SFP transceivers used in the line side
Parameter
Unit
Symbol
Bronze
Silver
Min
0
0
Output Optical Power
dBm
POUT
Type
(EOL)
TX Side
Max
+5
+5
SMSR
dB
SMSR
Min
30
30
Extinction Ratio
dB
ER
Min
8.2
8.2
Average Rx
dBm
RSENS
Max
-18
-28
Sensitivity@OC-48
RX Side
Maximum Input Power
dBm
PMAX
Min
-3
-9

Note
1
-

For the BRONZE, SLIVER SFPs, the sensitivity is measured with a PRBS 223-1 test pattern,
@2.5Gb/s, BER<10-12, EOL.
For the BRONZE, SILVER SFPs, all parameters at lower supported bitrates are better than
those at STM-16.For all these SFPs, all parameters are guaranteed under all operating
conditions, EOL.

N.B.
N.B.

The colored SFP also can be configured on the user side of WLA3C boards for broadcast application.
The colored SFP modules with DDM function have the same optical characteristic as the colored SFP
module without DDM function.
3.1.3

WLA configurations

3.1.3.1

Default configuration (add and drop configuration)

This configuration applies when a WLA3C board is used as a stand alone Add and Drop unit. And this
configuration is the default configuration of WLA3C.
The traffic received from a CWDM receiver is dropped on the user network, i.e. sent to a B&W
transmitter. Meanwhile the traffic received from the B&W receiver is added on to the CWDM line via
the CWDM transmitter.
The 8x8 matrix is configured as follows (example with channel 1):

WDM Rx1
ILOS

ED

01

Table 36
Alarms usage in add and drop configuration
Alarms
Consecutive Action
User Tx1
User Rx 1
WDM Tx1
ILOS
SD of the WDM Tx1
SD of the User Tx1

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

119/259

user
input

BW
Rx1

CWDM
Tx1

user
output

BW
Tx1

CWDM
Rx1

CWDM

output
CWDM

input

8 X8
Matrix
user
input

BW
Rx2

CWDM
Tx2

output

user
output

BW
Tx2

CWDM
Rx2

CWDM

CWDM

input

Figure 102 Add and drop matrix configuration


3.1.3.2

Local loopback configuration

This configuration is used for testing purposes on the user side. The B&W transponder on the WLA
board is configured as a loopback. In this configuration, the 8x8 matrix configuration is shown in the
next figure. Traffic received on a B&W receiver is sent to the corresponding B&W transmitter to be
tested. In this way, users can receive traffic sent by themselves. The local loopback configuration is not
allowed in the E-SNCP mode.

user
input

BW
Rx1

CWDM
Tx1

user
output

BW
Tx1

CWDM
Rx1

CWDM

output
CWDM

input

8 X8
Matrix

user
input

BW
Rx2

CWDM
Tx2

output

user
output

BW
Tx2

CWDM
Rx2

CWDM

CWDM

input

Figure 103 Local loopback matrix configuration


3.1.3.3

Remote loopback configuration

This configuration is used for testing purposes on the CWDM Side and the regenerator application. In
this configuration, the 8x8 matrix configuration is shown in the next figure (example with channel 1).
Traffic received from the CWDM receiver is sent to the corresponding CWDM transmitter to be tested.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

120/259

user
input

BW
Rx1

CWDM
Tx1

user
output

BW
Tx1

CWDM
Rx1

CWDM

output
CWDM

input

8X8
Matrix

user
input

BW
Rx2

CWDM
Tx2

output

user
output

BW
Tx2

CWDM
Rx2

CWDM

CWDM

input

Figure 104 Remote loopback matrix configuration


3.1.3.4

Local-remote loopback

This configuration is used for testing purposes on the user and CWDM side simultaneously. In this
configuration, the 8x8 matrix configuration is shown in the next figure (example with channel 1).
Traffic received from the receiver is sent to the corresponding transmitter to be tested.

user
input

BW
Rx1

CWDM
Tx1

user
output

BW
Tx1

CWDM
Rx1

CWDM

output
CWDM

input

8 X8
Matrix

user
input

BW
Rx2

CWDM
Tx2

output

user
output

BW
Tx2

CWDM
Rx2

CWDM

CWDM

input

Figure 105 Local-remote loopback matrix configuration


3.1.3.5

E-SNCP

The WLA3C boards perform the E-SNCP function.


They accept two kinds of operation mode: force and auto.
The E-SNCP protection is achieved through a technique called Parallel Transmit And Best One
Receive strategy on an electrical level. At the transmit side, the signal is broadcast on the two arms of
the ring and the available signal is selected at the receive side. The routing is done electrically in the
8x8 matrix, see next figure. In this kind of application, only one user channel, such as channel 1, is

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

121/259

equipped.
Table 37
Direction
West to East

East to West

Channel
1
1
2
1
2
1
2

Alarms usage in the auto E-SNCP configuration


Alarms
Consecutive Action
WDM Rx User Tx User Rx WDM Tx
ILOS
SD of WDM TX1 and WDM Tx2
ILOS
Switch WDM RX2 to User TX1
Switch WDM RX1 to User TX1

ILOS
ILOS
ILOS

No action

user input
BW
Rx1

CWDM

output
CWDM

input

CWDM
Tx1

CWDM

CWDM
Tx2

output

CWDM
Rx2

CWDM

8X 8
Matrix
CWDM
Rx1

input

BW
Tx1

user output
Figure 106 Electrical SNCP matrix configuration
3.1.3.6

O-SNCP

The WLA3COP boards achieve the O-SNCP function.


They accept 2 kinds of operation mode: force and auto.
The auto O-SNCP protection is achieved through a technique called Parallel Transmit And Best One
Receive strategy on an optical level. At the transmit side, the signal is broadcast on the two arms of
the ring and the available signal is selected at the receive side. The splitter and the coupler are used to
route optical signals in this application, see next figure.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

122/259

Table 38
Direction

Channel
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2

West to East

East to West

user
input

Alarms usage in the auto O-SNCP configuration


Alarms
Consecutive Action
WDM Rx User Tx User Rx WDM Tx
ILOS
SD of WDM TX1
ILOS
SD of WDM TX2
ILOS
SD of User TX1 and
Enable User TX2
SD of User TX2 and
Enable User TX1
ILOS
ILOS
No Action
ILOS

Splitter

BW
Rx1

CWDM
Tx1

BW
Tx1

CWDM
Rx1

CWDM

output
CWDM

input

8 X8
Matrix

user
output

Coupler

CWDM

BW
Rx2

CWDM
Tx2

output

BW
Tx2

CWDM
Rx2

CWDM

input

Figure 107 Optical SNCP matrix configuration


3.1.3.7

B-SNCP

B-SNCP (Broadcast Sub-Network Connection Protection) is the protection for broadcast services,
which is only supported by WLA3C.
Signals from the WDM are input in CWDM port 1 and broadcast to user port 1 and two WDM ports.
The routing is done electrically in the 8x8 matrix.
WLA3C accepts 2 kinds of operation mode: force and auto.
In force mode, the network management can command the Matrix to switch the CWDM RX1 or
CWDM RX2 to connect user TX1 unconditionally. In auto mode, WLA3C can command the Matrix to
switch the CWDM RX1 or CWDM RX2 to user TX1 and WDM TX1/TX2 (see table below for details).

CWDMRX1_LOS

ED

Table 39
Alarms usage in the auto B-SNCP configuration
CWDMRX2_LOS
Action

Shut down CWDM TX1 TX2 and user TX1

Switch CWDM RX2 to user TX1, and shut down CWDM TX1 TX2

Switch CWDM RX1 to user TX1

No Action

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

123/259

USER RX
1

In 1

USER TX
1

CDR1

8X8 MATRIX

Out1

CDR3

CWDM
RX 1

In 2

Out2

CWDM
TX 1

Main

In 4
CDR2

Out 0

Spare

Out3

CDR4

In 0
Out7

Out5

Out6

Out4

SDH
MONI 1

SDH
MONI 2

GE
MONI 1

GE
MONI 2

CWDM
TX 2
CWDM
RX 2

Figure 108 B-SNCP matrix configuration in one WLA3C


3.1.4

Performance monitoring

In WLA3C and WLA3COP boards, the following performances can be monitored:


SDH signal
For the SDH signal, the following performances will be monitored:
B1 errors monitoring
J0 monitoring
Gigabit Ethernet signal
For the Gigabit Ethernet signal, the following performances will be monitored:
TRCO (Total Received Correct Octets)
TRCF (Total Received Correct Frames)
TRCF_Unicast (Total Received Correct Frames Unicast)
TRCF_Multicast (Total Received Correct Frames Multicast)
TRCF_Broadcast (Total Received Correct Frames Broadcast)

TRSEF (Total Received Service Error frames)


In R3.2A, performance monitoring of SDH and GbE signal can be set on the two channels of one
board at the same time.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

124/259

3.1.5

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Power Failure LED


Out of Service LED
Channel1 Abnormal LED
Channel2 Abnormal LED
Hardware Failure LED

PWR
OOS
CH1
CH2

W1
U2
U2
U1
U1

BW Tx1
BW Rx1

W1

BW Tx2
BW Rx2

W2

CWDM Tx1
CWDM Rx1

W2

CWDM Tx2
CWDM Rx2

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 109 Front panel of WLA3C board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

125/259

Extraction
Handle

Power Failure LED


Out of Service LED
Channel1 Abnormal LED
Channel2 Abnormal LED
Hardware Failure LED

PWR
OOS
CH1
CH2

W2
W2
W1
W1
U2
U2
U1
U1

BW Tx1
BW Rx1

C1

BW Tx2
BW Rx2

S1

CWDM Tx1
CWDM Rx1

C2

CWDM Tx2
CWDM Rx2

S2

SPID O1
COUP I1

SPID O2
COUP I2

USER O
USER I

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 110 Front panel of WLA3COP board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

126/259

3.1.5.1

Front panel wiring


Table 40

Name
B&W Rx1
B&W Tx1
B&W Rx2
B&W Tx2
WDM Rx1
WDM Tx1
WDM Rx2
WDM Tx2

Front panel wiring of WLA3C board


Signal
User Reception: client input signal (channel 1, from client)
User Transmission: client output signal (channel 1, to client)
User Reception: client input signal (channel 2, from client)
User Transmission: client output signal (channel 2, to client)
WDM Reception: WDM input signal (channel 1, from C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Transmission: WDM output signal (channel 1, to C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Reception: WDM input signal (channel 2, from C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Transmission: WDM output signal (channel 2, to C-MDX or C-OAD board)
Table 41

Name
B&W Rx1
B&W Tx1
B&W Rx2
B&W Tx2
WDM Rx1
WDM Tx1
WDM Rx2
WDM Tx2
COUP I1
SPID O1
COUP I2
SPID O2
USER I
USER O
3.1.5.2
Name
PWR
OOS
CH1

CH2

ED

01

Front panel wiring of WLA3COP board


Signal
B&W signal Reception: (channel 1)
B&W signal Transmission: (channel 1)
B&W signal Reception: (channel 2)
B&W signal Transmission: (channel 2)
WDM Reception: WDM input signal (channel 1, from C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Transmission: WDM output signal (channel 1, to C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Reception: WDM input signal (channel 2, from C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Transmission: WDM output signal (channel 2, to C-MDX or C-OAD board)
Couple Input: (channel 1, from B&W Tx1)
Splitter Output: (channel1, to B&W Rx1)
Couple Input: (channel 2, from B&W Tx2)
Splitter Output: (channel2, to B&W Rx2)
User Reception: client input signal (from client to Splitter in board)
User Transmission: client output signal (from Couple in board to client)
LEDs meaning
Table 42
Meaning of WLA board front panel LEDs
LED Color
Meaning
Green
ON when the power supply is in standard range.
Yellow
LED is on when the board is un-configured or mismatching.
Channel1 Abnormal: problem on the channel1.
LED is on when:
Yellow
Rx alarm, Tx alarm or Bitrate_Threshold alarm
Unit type mismatch
Not configured in software
Channel1 Abnormal: problem on the channel2.
LED is on when:
Yellow
Rx alarm, Tx alarm or Bitrate_Threshold alarm
Unit type mismatch
Not configured in software
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished, and becomes Green
Green
when board is configured correctly. When the board is downloading
Orange
FPGA or after pressing LAT button, LED will be Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

127/259

3.2 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10)


The following OCC10 boards are used in R3.2A release:
OCC10-NA-1530 (195.900)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.000)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.100)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.200)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.300)
OCC10-EC-1530
OCC10-EC-1550
3.2.1

Description

The OCC10 unit transponder is a bidirectional multiclock interface for 10 Gbps native signals. It is
hardware compliant with ITU-T G.709 Rec.
This transponder can be provisioned to accept any digital signal at the nominal bit rate of
9.953 Gbps (STM-64/OC-192/10 GBE WAN)
10.3125 (GBE LAN).
To/from
future
To/from
future
matrix copy 0

USER
USER
RX
RX

WDM
WDM
RX
RX

CDR
CDR
8102

To/from
twin OCC10

To/from future
matrix copy 1

GREYHOND
10G 8x8
10G
8x8
MATRIX
MATRIX

FRAMER
FRAMER
8512

CDR
CDR
8102

FRAMER
FRAMER
8512

USER
USER
TX
TX

WDM
WDM
TX
TX

JTAG
JTAG

ALARM &
ALARM &
CONTROL
CONTROL
UNIT (FPGA
UNIT (FPGA)
ABBESSES)
ABBESSES

BATT
BATT
BATT
+BATT
BATT
BATT
BATT
+
BATT

A
A
AAB
B
BB+3.6 VS
+3.6VS

Power
Power
conversion
conversion
block
block

SPI
SPI
interface

interface
Additional
Additional
information
information
EEPROM
EEPROM

Remote
Remote
inventory
inventory
EEPROM
EEPROM

Figure 111 Block diagram of OCC10 board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

128/259

OCC10-NA board is used as CWDM 10G transponder. Only 2 CWDM channels are available:
1530nm and 1550 nm.
For CWDM 1530nm channel, at DWDM channel 195.9THz is used for OCC10-NA. For CWDM
1550nm channel, any one of the 4 DWDM channels can be selected: 193.0THz, 193.1THz,
193.2THz and 193.3THz.
And in 1692MSE R3.2A, OCC10-NA is configured with fixed B&W and colored module. The DDM
and Optical Measurement function are supported on line side.
For OCC10-EC board, there are also 2 channels for CWDM application: 1530nm and 1550nm,
which are compliant with G.694.2. With respect to OCC10-NA, XFP at user side can be plugged on
the front panel of OCC10-EC. And the VCC & XFP temperature measurements are not supported.
3.2.2

OCC10 configuration

There are only 2 channels available at CWDM grids for OCC10-NA/EC: 1530nm and 1550nm. Due
to the limitation of OADM wavelength plan, OCC10-NA/EC cannot support the following
applications:
Unidirectional 2ch 10G OADM
Unidirectional 4ch 10G OADM
Bidirectional 1ch 10G OADM
2ch 10G CPE
N.B.
For unidirectional 2ch and 4ch OADM application, only one 10G service transmission can
be supported by OCC10.
The following matrix configurations are supported in 1692MSE R3.2A: Add/Drop, Client loopback,
Line loopback. And Client loopback and Line loopback cant be configured simultaneously.

USER
RX

CDR

WDM
RX

FRAMER

8x8
MATRIX
GREYHOND
10G 8x8
MATRIX

CDR

FRAMER

USER
TX

WDM
TX

JTAG

ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
(FPGA
ABBESSES)
Figure 112 Add/Drop configuration of OCC10 board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

129/259

USER
RX

CDR

WDM
RX

FRAMER

8x8
MATRIX
GREYHOND
10G 8x8
MATRIX

CDR

FRAMER

USER
TX

WDM
TX

JTAG

ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
(FPGA
ABBESSES)

Figure 113 Client loopback configuration of OCC10 board

USER
RX

CDR

WDM
RX

FRAMER

8x8
MATRIX
GREYHOND
10G 8x8
MATRIX

CDR

FRAMER

USER
TX

WDM
TX

JTAG

ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
(FPGA
ABBESSES)

Figure 114 Line loopback configuration of OCC10 board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

130/259

3.2.3

Optical characteristics
Table 43

OCC10-NA optical characteristics


User side
Item
Value
User Tx output power
-6~-1
User Rx sensitivity including path penalty @1E-12
<-14
User Rx overload at 1E-12
>-1
Target Transmission Distance
20
WDM side
Item
Value
Tx output power
+1.5+7
Rx sensitivity including path penalty without Noise
<-23
@1E-12, FEC
Rx overload at 1E-12
>-9
Dispersion Tolerance
0~1600
OCC10-EC optical characteristics
User side
Item
Value
User Tx output power
-6~-1
User Rx sensitivity including path penalty @1E-12
<-14
User Rx overload at 1E-12
>-1
Target Transmission Distance
20
WDM side
Item
Value
Tx output power
+3+7
Rx sensitivity including path penalty without Noise
<-23
@1E-12, FEC
Rx overload at 1E-12
>-9
Dispersion Tolerance
0~1600

Unit
dBm
dBm
dBm
km
Unit
dBm
dBm
dBm
ps/nm

Table 44

ED

01

Unit
dBm
dBm
dBm
km
Unit
dBm
dBm
dBm
ps/nm

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

131/259

3.2.4

Front panel description


OCC10-NA

OCC10-EC

Extraction Handle

Extraction Handle

Power Failure LED


Out of Service LED
Abnormal Rx LED

PWR
OOS
RXA

Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware Failure LED

TXA

MF

Power Failure LED


Out of Service LED
Abnormal Rx LED

PWR
OOS
RXA

Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware Failure LED

TXA

MF

APSD Restart button


Not used

APSD Restart button


Not used

User Tx
User Rx
U

User Rx
User Tx

WDM Rx
WDM Tx

10Gbps Rx
Not used

WDM Rx
WDM Tx

10Gbps Rx
Not used

10Gbps Tx
Not used

10Gbps Tx
Not used

Optical Safety Label

Optical Safety Label

Extraction Handle

Extraction Handle

Figure 115 Front panel of OCC10 board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

132/259

Table 45

Front panel wiring of OCC10 board


Optical Signal
User Reception: client input signal (from client)
User Transmission: client output signal (to client)
WDM Reception: WDM input signal from MDX/OAD
WDM Transmission: WDM output signal to MDX/OAD

Name
User Rx
User Tx
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
LEDs signification

Table 46
LED Color
Green
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow

Name
POWER
OOS
RXA
TXA

Red
Green
Orange

HWF

ED

01

Meaning of OCC10 board front panel LEDs


Meaning
Managed by HW. ON when the board is plugged and no HWF
LED ON when the board plugged but not configured by the SW
RX Abnormal: problem on the Egress side. Managed by the SW.
TX abnormal: problem on the ingress side. Managed by the SW.
Hardware Failure. Managed by the SW.
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

133/259

3.3 2XGE-FC Unit


2XGE-FC board is one slot wide board implement GbE aggregation with standard GFP-T
encapsulation. See the following.
Client

Line

1
1
2

Mapper
+
Framer
2

Not used

Figure 116 Block diagram of 2XGE-FC board


3.3.1

Description

In R3.2A, it can support two clients aggregation/extraction into/from 1 STM-16/OC-48 Frame.


At client side, there are four client interfaces. Only two of them are available in this release. GE can be
supported in R3.2A.
3.3.2

Optical interfaces

In this release, the following SFPs can be used in the subslots of 2XGE-FC board.
For client side:
GbE_SX, GbE_LX, GbE_SX_DDM, GbE_LX_DDM and GbE_ZX_DDM.
For line side:
I16, S16.1, L16.1, L16.2, I16_DDM, S16.1_DDM, PIN and APD (with or without DDM).
Please refer to 3.1.2 for optical parameters of SFPs.
3.3.3

2XGE-FC configuration

From client Rx to line Tx side, after O-E converting, the two serial signals are sent to the mapper. After
internal processing in the mapper, the client service are encapsulated into GFP frame and framed into
STM-16/OC-48 frame. The STM-16/OC-48 signal is sent to the two line side transceivers and muxed
into serial signals.
From line Rx to client Tx side, the signal flow is reverse and E-SNCP is configured to protect the line
port.
The SFPs plugged on CWDM1 and CWDM2 are set as main SFP and slave SFP respectively. As above
said, the serial Tx data is transmitted to both CWDM sides via CDR. Received signal from two SFP line
side can be selected automatically according to the received signals status. Rx_LOS or SFP missing is
the switching criteria. The protection is non-revertive.
If Rx_LOS or LOF occurs on the local client Rx, the opposite client Tx of 2XGE-FC will shut down
automatically. See the following.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

134/259

LOS/ LOF Rx
Tx

Client

Line

Client

Line

Mapper
+
Framer

Mapper
+
Framer

Not used

Tx

Laser shut
down

Rx

Not used

Remote

Local

Figure 117 Communication between two 2XGE-FC board (example)


Loopback configuration on client side and line side are supported on 2XGE-FC board. They can be set
at the same time.
Client
1
Line
1

Client
2

Mapper+Framer
Line
2

Not used

Figure 118 Local loopback configuration of 2XGE-FC board


Client
1
Line
1

Client
2

Mapper + Framer
Line
2

Not used

Figure 119 Remote loopback configuration of 2XGE-FC board


The default laser state of SFP on line side is on. Please pay attention to that the laser status of user side
should be set as forced on when local loopback configuration. It is suggested to perform remote
loopback on one of the line sides because of the E-SNCP.
In R3.2A, performance monitoring is not supported on 2XGE-FC.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

135/259

3.3.4

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

DBG Interface RJ45


Not Used

U1

BW Tx1
BW Rx1

U2

BW Tx2
BW Rx2

U3

BW Tx3
BW Rx3

U4

BW Tx4
BW Rx4

CWDM Tx1
CWDM Rx1

W-P

CWDM Tx2
CWDM Rx2

RST

RESET Push Button


Not Used
Optical Safety Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 120 Front panel of 2XGE-FC board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

136/259

Table 47
Name
B&W Rx1
B&W Tx1
B&W Rx2
B&W Tx2
B&W Rx3
B&W Tx3
B&W Rx4
B&W Tx4
WDM Rx1
WDM Tx1
WDM Rx2
WDM Tx2

Front panel wiring of 2XGE-FC board


Optical Signal

B&W signal Reception: (channel 1)


B&W signal Transmission: (channel 1)
B&W signal Reception: (channel 2)
B&W signal Transmission: (channel 2)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
WDM Reception: WDM input signal (channel 1, from C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Transmission: WDM output signal (channel 1, to C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Reception: WDM input signal (channel 2, from C-MDX or C-OAD board)
WDM Transmission: WDM output signal (channel 2, to C-MDX or C-OAD board)

LEDs signification
Name

ED

01

Table 48
Meaning of 2XGE-FC board front panel LEDs
LED Color
Meaning
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished, and becomes Green
Green
when board is configured correctly. When the board is downloading
Orange
FPGA or after pressing LAT button, LED will be Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

137/259

3.4 MUX/DEMUX units (C-MDX)


The following C-MDX boards are used:
MUX/DMX with OSC for unidirectional system: C-MDX-E-U-S
MUX/DMX without OSC for unidirectional system: C-MDX-U
MUX/DMX with OSC for bi-directional system: C-MDX-B-S
MUX/DMX without OSC for bi-directional system: C-MDX-B
3.4.1

C-MDX-E-U-S

1470
1490
1510
1530

MUX

1550
1570

MUX out
1310nm
Filter

Line Tx
out

1590
1610

OSC Tx
in
OSC Rx
out
1470
1490
1310nm
Filter

Line Rx
in

1510
DEMUX in

DEMUX

1530
1550
1570
1590
1610

Figure 121 C-MDX-E-U-S block diagram

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

138/259

3.4.1.1

Description

a)
MUX side
The MUX component multiplexes 8 channels (CWDM grid) signals into an optical fiber. The 1310nm
filter couples the MUX out signal and OSC signal into the line fiber.
b)
DEMUX side
At the receive side, the 1310nm filter splits the line signal into two channel signals. One is sent to the
OSC board, the other is demultiplexed into 8 channel signals by a DEMUX component.
3.4.1.2

Optical characteristics
Table 49

C-MDX-E-U-S optical characteristics


MUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
OSC In (1310nm)->Line out (Max)
1
CH1 In ->LINE OUT (1470nm) (Max)
1.4
CH2 In ->LINE OUT (1490nm) (Max)
1.7
CH3 In ->LINE OUT (1510nm) (Max)
2.0
CH4 In ->LINE OUT (1530nm) (Max)
2.3
CH5 In ->LINE OUT (1550nm) (Max)
2.6
CH6 In ->LINE OUT (1570nm) (Max)
2.9
CH7 In ->LINE OUT (1590nm) (Max)
3.2
CH8 In ->LINE OUT (1610nm) (Max)
3.5
Channel passband at -0.5dB (include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
DEMUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
LINE IN->OSC Out (1310nm)(Max)
1
LINE IN->CH1 Out (1470nm) (Max)
1.4
LINE IN->CH2 Out (1490nm) (Max)
3.5
LINE IN->CH3 Out (1510nm) (Max)
3.2
LINE IN->CH4 Out (1530nm) (Max)
2.9
LINE IN->CH5 Out (1550nm) (Max)
2.6
LINE IN->CH6 Out (1570nm) (Max)
2.3
LINE IN->CH7 Out (1590nm) (Max)
2.0
LINE IN->CH8 Out (1610nm) (Max)
1.7
Channel passband at -0.5dB (include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
Fiber Specs
Fiber type
Connector type
Reflectance
All input ports (Max)

ED

01

Unit
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
nm
Unit
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
nm

Type
0.9/2mm SMF28
MU
Value
Unit
-40
dB

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

139/259

3.4.1.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

OSC Tx in
OSC Rx out
Line Rx in
Line Tx out

47

1470nm signal in
1470nm signal out

49

1490nm signal in
1490nm signal out

51

1510nm signal in
1510nm signal out

53

1530nm signal in
1530nm signal out

55

1550nm signal in
1550nm signal out

57

1570nm signal in
1570nm signal out

59

1590nm signal in
1590nm signal out

61

1610nm signal in
1610nm signal out

Extraction
Handle

Figure 122 Front panel of C-MDX-E-U-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

140/259

3.4.1.4

Front panel wiring


Table 50

Front panel wiring of C-MDX-E-U-S board


Signal
Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
Line Reception input signal (from line)
Line Transmission output signal (to line)
WDM transmission input signal (from corresponding transponder)
WDM reception output signal (to corresponding transponder)

Name
OSC Tx in
OSC Rx out
Line Rx in
Line Tx out
## nm signal in
## nm signal out
N.B.

## means from 1470 to 1610.

LEDs signification
Table 51
Red
Green
Orange

ED

01

Meaning of C-MDX-E-U-S board front panel LEDs


LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

141/259

3.4.2

C-MDX-U

1470
1490
1510
1530
1550

Line Tx
out

MUX

1570
1590
1610

1470
1490
1510
Line Rx
in

1530

DEMUX

1550
1570
1590
1610

3.4.2.1

Description

Figure 123 C-MDX-U block diagram

a)
MUX side
The MUX component multiplexes 8 channel (CWDM grid) signals into an optical fiber.
b)
DEMUX side
The DEMUX component demultiplexes the line signal into 8 channel signals.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

142/259

3.4.2.2

Optical characteristics
Table 52

C-MDX-U optical characteristics


MUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
CH1 In ->LINE OUT (1470nm) (Max)
0.9
CH2 In ->LINE OUT (1490nm) (Max)
1.2
CH3 In ->LINE OUT (1510nm) (Max)
1.5
CH4 In ->LINE OUT (1530nm) (Max)
1.8
CH5 In ->LINE OUT (1550nm) (Max)
2.1
CH6 In ->LINE OUT (1570nm) (Max)
2.4
CH7 In ->LINE OUT (1590nm) (Max)
2.7
CH8 In ->LINE OUT (1610nm) (Max)
3
Channel passband at -0.5dB (include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
DEMUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
LINE IN->CH1 Out (1470nm) (Max)
0.9
LINE IN->CH2 Out (1490nm) (Max)
3
LINE IN->CH3 Out (1510nm) (Max)
2.7
LINE IN->CH4 Out (1530nm) (Max)
2.4
LINE IN->CH5 Out (1550nm) (Max)
2.1
LINE IN->CH6 Out (1570nm) (Max)
1.8
LINE IN->CH7 Out (1590nm) (Max)
1.5
LINE IN->CH8 Out (1610nm) (Max)
1.2
Channel passband at -0.5dB (include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
Fiber Specs
Fiber type
Connector type
Reflectance
All input ports (Max)

ED

01

Unit
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
nm
Unit
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
nm

Type
0.9/2mm SMF28
MU
Value
Unit
-40
dB

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

143/259

3.4.2.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED


Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

s
Line Rx in
Line Tx out
47

1470nm signal in
1470nm signal out

49

1490nm signal in
1490nm signal out

51

1510nm signal in
1510nm signal out

53

1530nm signal in
1530nm signal out

55

1550nm signal in
1550nm signal out

57

1570nm signal in
1570nm signal out

59

1590nm signal in
1590nm signal out

61

1610nm signal in
1610nm signal out

Extraction
Handle

Figure 124 Front panel of C-MDX-U board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

144/259

3.4.2.4

Front panel wiring


Table 53

Front panel wiring of C-MDX-U board


Signal
Line Reception input signal (from line)
Line Transmission output signal (to line)
WDM transmission input signal (from corresponding transponder)
WDM reception output signal (to corresponding transponder)

Name
Line Rx in
Line Tx out
## nm signal in
## nm signal out
N.B.

## means from 1470 to 1610.

LEDs signification
Table 54
Red
Green
Orange

ED

01

Meaning of C-MDX-U board front panel LEDs


LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

145/259

3.4.3

C-MDX-B-S

1310nm
Circulator

OSC Rx out
OSC Tx in

1310nm
Filter

Line

CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4

MUX

CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
CH 8

3.4.3.1

Description

Figure 125 C-MDX-B-S block diagram

As mentioned before, the 8:1 multiplexer can also be used in bi-directional line terminal configuration
to multiplex/demultiplex signals. In this application, 1310nm circulators are used to
multiplex/demultiplex bi-directional 1310nm wavelengths of the OSC. An extra 131030nm filter is
also used to avoid the 1310nm multiplexing affecting the 1550nm transmission.
3.4.3.2

Optical characteristics

Table 55
C-MDX-B-S optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
I/O <->OSC channel (1310nm)(Max)
2
I/O <->CH1 (1470nm) (Max)
1.4
I/O <->CH2 (1490nm) (Max)
1.7
I/O <->CH3 (1510nm) (Max)
2.0
I/O <->CH4 (1530nm) (Max)
2.3
I/O <->CH5 (1550nm) (Max)
2.6
I/O <->CH6 (1570nm) (Max)
2.9
I/O <->CH7 (1590nm) (Max)
3.2
I/O <->CH8 (1610nm) (Max)
3.5
Channel passband at -0.5dB (include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
Fiber Specs
Fiber type
Connector type
Reflectance
All input ports (Max)

ED

01

Unit
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
nm

Type
0.9/2mm SMF28
MU
Value
Unit
-40
dB

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

146/259

3.4.3.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

OSC Tx in
OSC Rx out
LINE
Not used

47 49 5153 55 57 5961

1470 nm signal in or out


1490 nm signal in or out
1510 nm signal in or out
1530 nm signal in or out
1550 nm signal in or out
1570 nm signal in or out
1590 nm signal in or out
1610 nm signal in or out

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 126 Front panel of C-MDX-B-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

147/259

3.4.3.4

Front panel wiring

Table 56
Front panel wiring of C-MDX-B-S board
Name
Signal
OSC Tx in
Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
OSC Rx out
Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
Line
Line signal (from/to line)
Not used
## nm signal in or out
WDM signal (from/to corresponding transponder)
N.B.

## means from 1470 to 1610.

LEDs signification
Table 57
Red
Green
Orange

ED

01

Meaning of C-MDX-B-S board front panel LEDs


LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

148/259

3.4.4

C-MDX-B

CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4

Line

MUX

CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
CH 8

Figure 127 C-MDX-B block diagram


3.4.4.1

Optical characteristics

Table 58
C-MDX-B optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
I/O <->CH1 (1470nm) (Max)
0.9
I/O <->CH2 (1490nm) (Max)
1.2
I/O <->CH3 (1510nm) (Max)
1.5
I/O <->CH4 (1530nm) (Max)
1.8
I/O <->CH5 (1550nm) (Max)
2.1
I/O <->CH6 (1570nm) (Max)
2.4
I/O <->CH7 (1590nm) (Max)
2.7
I/O <->CH8 (1610nm) (Max)
3
Channel passband at -0.5dB (include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
Fiber Specs
Fiber type
Connector type
Reflectance
All input ports (Max)

ED

01

Unit
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
nm

Type
0.9/2mm SMF28
MU
Value
Unit
-40
dB

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

149/259

3.4.4.2

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

s
LINE
Not used
47 49 5153 55 57 59 61

1470 nm signal in or out


1490 nm signal in or out
1510 nm signal in or out
1530 nm signal in or out
1550 nm signal in or out
1570 nm signal in or out
1590 nm signal in or out
1610 nm signal in or out

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 128 Front panel of C-MDX-B board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

150/259

3.4.4.3

Front panel wiring


Table 59
Name

Line
Not used
## nm signal in or out
N.B.

Front panel wiring of C-MDX-B board


Signal
Line signal (from/to line)
WDM signal (from/to corresponding transponder)

## means from 1470 to 1610.

LEDs signification
Table 60
Red
Green
Orange

ED

01

Meaning of C-MDX-B board front panel LEDs


LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

151/259

3.5 MUX/DEMUX units (C-MDX2)


The following C-MDX2 boards are used:
MUX/DMX2 with OSC for unidirectional system: C-MDX2-E-U-S
MUX/DMX2 without OSC for unidirectional system: C-MDX2-U
1-channel MUX/DMX2 with OSC for unidirectional system: C-MDX2-E-1-S
2-channel MUX/DMX2 with OSC for unidirectional system: C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S
3.5.1

C-MDX2-E-U-S

1470
1490
1510
1530
1550
1570
1590
1610

MUX

MUX out
1310nm
Filter

Line Tx
out

OSC Tx
in
OSC Rx
out
1470
1490

5:95 TAP

Line Rx
in

95%

1310nm
Filter
DEMUX in

DEMUX

5%

PIN AMP

3.5.1.1

Description

1510
1530
1550
1570
1590
1610

Figure 129 C-MDX2-E-U-S block diagram

a)
MUX side
The MUX component multiplexes 8 channel (CWDM grid) signals into an optical fiber. The 1310nm
filter couples the MUX out signal and OSC signal into the line fiber.
b)
DEMUX side
At the receive side, the 5:95 TAP splits the line signal into two channels. One (95%) is sent to 1310nm
filter splitter; the other (5%) is sent to a PIN & amplification circuit for LOS detection. The 1310nm filter
splits the input signal into two channel signals. One is sent to OSC board, the other is demultiplexed
into 8 channels signals by the DEMUX component.
The front panel and front panel wiring are the same as the C-MDX-E-U-S unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

152/259

3.5.2

C-MDX2-U

1470
1490
1510
1530

Line Tx
out

MUX

1550
1570
1590
1610

1470
1490
1510
Line Rx
in

5:95 TAP

95%

DEMUX

1530
1550
1570

5%

1590
1610

PIN AMP

Figure 130 C-MDX2-U block diagram


3.5.2.1

Description

a)
MUX side
The MUX component multiplexes 8 channel (CWDM grid) signals into an optical fiber.
b)
DEMUX side
At the receive side, the 5:95 TAP splits the line signal into two channels. One (95%) is sent to the
DEMUX component; the other (5%) is sent to a PIN & amplification circuit for LOS detection. The
DEMUX component demultiplexes the line signal into 8 channel signals.
The front panel and front panel wiring are the same as the C-MDX-U unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

153/259

3.5.3

C-MDX2-E-1-S

CH1
input
1310nm
input

Mux
output

1310nm
Filter

95%

Demux
input

5:95 TAP

1310nm
Filter

1310nm
Filter

1310nm
output
CH1
output

5%
PIN
AMP

Figure 131 C-MDX2-E-1-S block diagram


3.5.3.1

Description

The C-MDX2-E-1-S boards are only for the CPE application.


This board is designed to multiplex/demultiplex one channel wavelengths to/from a fiber. It provides
insertion/extraction of the 1310nm OSC signal or the 1310nm SDH signal. Input optical signal LOS
detection is integrated into the unit.
3.5.3.2

Optical characteristics
Table 61

C-MDX2-E-1-S optical characteristics


MUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
OSC In->MUX (1310nm)(Max)
1
CH1 In->MUX (Max)
0.9
DEMUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
DEMUX->OSC Out (1310nm)(Max)
1.5
DEMUX->CH1 Out (Max)
1.9
Temperature Specs
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Fiber Specs
Fiber type
Connector type
Reflectance
All input ports (Max)

ED

01

Unit
dB
dB
Unit
dB
dB

Value
Unit
070

-40+85

Type
0.9/2mm SMF28
MU
Value
Unit
-40
dB

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

154/259

3.5.3.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

1310nm signal input


1310nm signal output
DMX signal input
MUX signal output

CH

CH1 signal input


CH1 signal output

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 132 Front panel of C-MDX2-E-1-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

155/259

3.5.3.4

Front panel wiring


Table 62

Name
1310nm signal input
1310nm signal output
DMX signal input
MUX signal output
CH1 signal input
CH1 signal output

Front panel wiring of C-MDX2-E-1-S board


Signal
Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board) or other1310nm input
Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board) or other1310nm output
Line Reception input signal (from line)
Line Transmission output signal (to line)
WDM transmission input signal (from corresponding transponder)
WDM reception output signal (to corresponding transponder)

LEDs signification
Table 63
Meaning of C-MDX2-E-1-S board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

156/259

3.5.4

C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S

CH1 input
OADM
CH2 input

1310nm
Filter

MUX output

OSC input

OSC output
DEMUX input

95%
5:95 TAP

1310nm
Filter

5%

CH1 output
OADM
CH2 output

PIN AMP

Figure 133 C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S block diagram


3.5.4.1

Description

The C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S boards are only for the CPE application.


This board is designed to multiplex/demultiplex two channels wavelengths to/from a fiber. It provides
insertion/extraction of the 1310nm OSC signal or the 1310nm SDH signal.
Input optical signal LOS detection is integrated into the unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

157/259

3.5.4.2

Optical characteristics
Table 64

Optical parameter of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S


MUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
OSC In->MUX (1310nm)(Max)
1
CH1/2 In->MUX (Max)
1.8
Channel passband at -0.5dB(include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
DEMUX Side
Insertion Losses
Value
DEMUX->OSC Out (1310nm)(Max)
1.5
DEMUX->CH1/2 Out (Max)
2.3
Channel passband at -0.5dB (include channel center
14
wavelength -6+8 range)
Temperature Specs
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Fiber Specs
Fiber type
Connector type
Reflectance
All input ports (Max)

ED

01

Unit
dB
dB
nm
Unit
dB
dB
nm

Value
Unit
070

-40+85

Type
0.9/2mm SMF28
MU
Value
Unit
-40
dB

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

158/259

3.5.4.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

1310nm signal input


1310nm signal output
DMX signal input
MUX signal output

CH

CH1 signal input


CH1 signal output

CH

CH2 signal input


CH2 signal output

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 134 Front panel of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

159/259

3.5.4.4

Front panel wiring

Table 65
Front panel wiring of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S board
Name
Signal
1310nm signal input
Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board) or other1310nm input
1310nm signal output Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board) or other1310nm output
DMX signal input
Line Reception input signal (from line)
MUX signal output
Line Transmission output signal (to line)
CH1 signal input
WDM transmission input signal (from corresponding transponder)
CH1 signal output
WDM reception output signal (to corresponding transponder)
CH2 signal input
WDM transmission input signal (from corresponding transponder)
CH2 signal output
WDM reception output signal (to corresponding transponder)
N.B.

CH1 can be 1470nm, 1510nm, 1550nm, or 1590nm.


CH2 can be 1490nm, 1530nm, 1570nm, or 1610nm.

LEDs signification
Table 66
Meaning of C-MDX2-E-2-XX-S board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

160/259

3.6 OADM units (C-OAD)


The following C-OAD boards are used:
UNIDIRECTIONAL 1 Add & Drop C-OAD with OSC: C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S
UNIDIRECTIONAL 1 Add & Drop C-OAD without OSC: C-OAD-U-1-XX
UNIDIRECTIONAL 2 Add & Drop C-OAD with OSC: C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S
UNIDIRECTIONAL 2 Add & Drop C-OAD without OSC: C-OAD-U-2-XXXX
Bi-directional 1 Add/Drop C-OAD with OSC: C-OAD-B-1-XX-S
Bi-directional 1 Add/Drop C-OAD without OSC: C-OAD-B-1-XX
3.6.1

C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S
Express Ch Add
Input Channel

Drop Express Ch
Channel Output

OADM
X1

1310nm Filter
O1

West to East
in

1310nm Filter
O2

West to East
out

Drop OSC

Add OSC

Add OSC

Drop OSC

East to West
out

1310nm Filter
O4

1310nm Filter
O3

East to West
in

OADM
X2

Add Express Ch
Channel
Input

Express Ch Drop
Output Channel

Figure 135 C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S block diagram

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

161/259

3.6.1.1

Description

This board (C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S) is used to add and drop ONE Channel per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system; the added/dropped channel is from/to the WLA (or OCC10, 2XGE-FC,
C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is also added/dropped by this board. The dropped OSC signal is sent to the
OSC board; the added OSC signal comes from the OSC board.
All channels can be added and dropped. There are 8 different 1-channel C-OAD boards according to
the different wavelengths; the wavelengths are defined as in the following table.
Table 67
1-channel C-OAD module for unidirectional application
Number (XX)
4747 4949 5151 5353 5555 5757 5959
Add/Drop Channels (nm) 1470 1490 1510 1530 1550 1570 1590

6161
1610

There are two OADM modules (one OADM module for each direction) in the board.
3.6.1.2

Optical characteristics
Table 68
C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
IN->Exp Ch OUT (Max)
1.3
dB
Exp Ch IN->OUT (Max)
1.3
dB
IN->DROP (Max)
1.5
dB
ADD->OUT (Max)
1.5
dB
IN->OSC DROP (Max)
1
dB
OSC ADD->OUT (Max)
1
dB
Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

162/259

3.6.1.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

S-E

East OSC Tx in
East OSC Rx out

S-W

West OSC Tx in
West OSC Rx out

East line Rx in
East line Tx out

YY-E

East YY nm signal add


East YY nm signal drop

East express signal add


East express signal drop

West line Rx in
West line Tx out

YY-W

West YY nm signal add


West YY nm signal drop

West express signal add


West express signal drop

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 136 Front panel of C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

163/259

3.6.1.4

Front panel wiring

Table 69
Name
East OSC Tx in
East OSC Rx out
West OSC Tx in
West OSC Rx out
East Line Rx in
East Line Tx out
East YY nm signal add
East YY nm signal drop
East express signal add
East express signal drop
West Line Rx in
West Line Tx out
West YY nm signal add
West YY nm signal drop
West express signal add
West express signal drop

Front panel wiring of C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S board


Signal
East Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
East Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
West Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
West Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
East Line Reception input signal (from line)
East Line Transmission output signal (to line)
East YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East express signal add (from East express signal drop)
East express signal drop
West Line Reception input signal (from line)
West Line Transmission output signal (to line)
West YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West express signal add (from West express signal drop)
West express signal drop

N.B.

YY is one of the CWDM wavelengths (1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610).

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 70
Meaning of C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

164/259

3.6.2

C-OAD-U-1-XX
Drop Express Ch
Channel Output

Add
Express Ch
Channel
Input

OADM
X1
West to East
in

West to East
out

East to West
out

East to West
in

OADM
X2

Add Express Ch
Channel
Input

Express Ch Drop
Output Channel

Figure 137 C-OAD-U-1-XX block diagram


3.6.2.1

Description

This board (C-OAD-U-1-XX) is used to add and drop ONE Channel per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system, and the added/dropped channel is from/to the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD board. The OSC
1310nm signal is NOT added and dropped by this board.
All channels can be added and dropped. There are 8 different 1-channel C-OAD boards according to
the different wavelengths; the wavelengths are defined the same as in table 60. There are two OADM
modules (one OADM module for each direction) in the C-OAD board.
3.6.2.2

Optical characteristics
Table 71
C-OAD-U-1-XX optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
IN->Exp Ch OUT (Max)
0.8
dB
Exp Ch IN->OUT (Max)
0.8
dB
IN->DROP (Max)
1
dB
ADD->OUT (Max)
1
dB
Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

165/259

3.6.2.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

S-E

S-W

E
YY-E

East line Rx in
East line Tx out
East YY nm signal add
East YY nm signal drop

East express signal add


East express signal drop

West line Rx in
West line Tx out

YY-W

West YY nm signal add


West YY nm signal drop

West express signal add


West express signal drop

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 138 Front panel of C-OAD-U-1-XX board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

166/259

3.6.2.4

Front panel wiring

Table 72
Name
East Line Rx in
East Line Tx out
East YY nm signal add
East YY nm signal drop
East express signal add
East express signal drop
West Line Rx in
West Line Tx out
West YY nm signal add
West YY nm signal drop
West express signal add
West express signal drop

Front panel wiring of C-OAD-U-1-XX board


Signal
East Line Reception input signal (from line)
East Line Transmission output signal (to line)
East YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East express signal add (from East express signal drop)
East express signal drop
West Line Reception input signal (from line)
West Line Transmission output signal (to line)
West YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West express signal add (from West express signal drop)
West express signal drop

N.B.

YY is one of the CWDM wavelengths (1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610).

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 73
Meaning of C-OAD-U-1-XX board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

167/259

3.6.3

C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S
Drop
Ch1

Drop
Ch2

Express Ch
Output

Express Ch
Input

Add
Ch1

Add
Ch2

OADM
X1

1310nm Filter
O1

West to East
in

1310nm Filter
O2

West to East
out

Drop OSC

Add OSC

Add OSC

Drop OSC

1310nm Filter
O3

East to West
out

1310nm Filter
O4

East to West
in

OADM
X2

Add
Ch1

Add
Ch2

Express Ch
Input

Express Ch
Drop Drop
Output
Ch2 Ch1

Figure 139 C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S block diagram


3.6.3.1

Description

This board (C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S) is used to add and drop TWO Channels per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system and the added/dropped channels are to/from the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is also added/dropped by this board. The dropped OSC signal is sent to the
OSC board; the added OSC signal comes from the OSC board.
There are 4 types of 2-channel C-OAD boards. The wavelengths are defined as in the following table.
There are two OADM modules (one OADM modules for each direction) in the C-OAD board.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

168/259

Table 74
Number (XX)

2-channel C-OAD modules for unidirectional applications


47474949
51515353
55555757
59596161

Add/Drop Channels (nm)


3.6.3.2

1470,1490

1510,1530

1550,1570

1590,1610

Optical characteristics
Table 75
C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
IN->Exp Ch OUT (Max)
1.5
dB
Exp Ch IN->OUT (Max)
1.5
dB
IN->DROP (Max)
1.8
dB
ADD->OUT (Max)
1.8
dB
IN->OSC DROP (Max)
1
dB
OSC ADD->OUT (Max)
1
dB
Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

169/259

3.6.3.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

S-E

East OSC Tx in
East OSC Rx out

S-W

West OSC Tx in
West OSC Rx out

East line Rx in
East line Tx out

YY-E

East YY nm signal add


East YY nm signal drop

ZZ-E

East ZZ nm signal add


East ZZ nm signal drop

East express signal add


East express signal drop

West line Rx in
West line Tx out

YY-W

West YY nm signal add


West YY nm signal drop

ZZ-W

West ZZ nm signal add


West ZZ nm signal drop

West express signal add


West express signal drop

Extraction
Handle

Figure 140 Front panel of C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

170/259

3.6.3.4

Front panel wiring

Table 76
Name
East OSC Tx in
East OSC Rx out
West OSC Tx in
West OSC Rx out
East Line Rx in
East Line Tx out
East YY nm signal add
East YY nm signal drop
East ZZ nm signal add
East ZZ nm signal drop
East express signal add
East express signal drop
West Line Rx in
West Line Tx out
West YY nm signal add
West YY nm signal drop
West ZZ nm signal add
West ZZ nm signal drop
West express signal add
West express signal drop

Front panel wiring of C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S board


Signal
East Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
East Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
West Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
West Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
East Line Reception input signal (from line)
East Line Transmission output signal (to line)
East YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East express signal add (from East express signal drop)
East express signal drop
West Line Reception input signal (from line)
West Line Transmission output signal (to line)
West YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West ZZ nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West ZZ nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West express signal add (from West express signal drop)
West express signal drop

N.B.

(YY, ZZ) is one of the CWDM wavelengths combinations [(1470, 1490), (1510, 1530),
(1550, 1570), (1590, 1610)].

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 77
Meaning of C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

171/259

3.6.4

C-OAD-U-2-XXXX
Drop
Ch1

Drop
Express Ch
Ch2
Output

Express Ch Add
Ch1
Input

Add
Ch2

OADM
X1
West to East
in

West to East
out

East to West
out

East to West
in

OADM
X2

Add
Ch1

Add
Ch2

Express Ch
Input

Express Ch
Output

Drop Drop
Ch2 Ch1

Figure 141 C-OAD-U-2-XXXX block diagram


3.6.4.1

Description

This board (C-OAD-U-2-XX) is used to add and drop TWO Channels per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system and the added/dropped channels are to/from the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is NOT added/dropped by this board. There are 4 types of 2-channel
C-OAD boards, the wavelengths are defined the same as in Table 74.There are two OADM modules
(one OADM modules for each direction) in the C-OAD board.
3.6.4.2

Optical characteristics
Table 78
C-OAD-U-2-XXXX optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
1.0
dB
INExp Ch OUT (Max)
1.0
dB
Exp Ch IN OUT (Max)
IN->DROP (Max)
1.3
dB
ADD->OUT (Max)
1.3
dB
Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

172/259

3.6.4.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED


Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

S-E

S-W

East line Rx in
East line Tx out

YY-E

East YY nm signal add


East YY nm signal drop

ZZ-E

East ZZ nm signal add


East ZZ nm signal drop

East express signal add


East express signal drop

West line Rx in
West line Tx out

YY-W

West YY nm signal add


West YY nm signal drop

ZZ-W

West ZZ nm signal add


West ZZ nm signal drop

West express signal add


West express signal drop

Extraction
Handle

Figure 142 Front panel of C-OAD-U-2-XXXX board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

173/259

3.6.4.4

Front panel wiring

Table 79
Name
East Line Rx in
East Line Tx out
East YY nm signal add
East YY nm signal drop
East ZZ nm signal add
East ZZ nm signal drop
East express signal add
East express signal drop
West Line Rx in
West Line Tx out
West YY nm signal add
West YY nm signal drop
West ZZ nm signal add
West ZZ nm signal drop
West express signal add
West express signal drop

Front panel wiring of C-OAD-U-2-XXXX board


Signal
East Line Reception input signal (from line)
East Line Transmission output signal (to line)
East YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East express signal add (from East express signal drop)
East express signal drop
West Line Reception input signal (from line)
West Line Transmission output signal (to line)
West YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West ZZ nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West ZZ nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West express signal add (from West express signal drop)
West express signal drop

N.B.

(YY, ZZ) is one of the CWDM wavelengths combinations [(1470, 1490), (1510, 1530),
(1550, 1570), (1590, 1610)].

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 80
Meaning of C-OAD-U-2-XXXX board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

174/259

3.6.5

C-OAD-B-1-XX-S
Drop East
OSC

Add
West OSC

Drop West
OSC

1310nm Circulator
O3

1310nm Circulator
O4

Add/Drop
OSC

Add/Drop
OSC

1310nm Filter
O1

Line I/O 1

Add
East OSC

1310nm Filter
O2

Line I/O 2

OADM

Express Ch
Add
Drop
I/O
East Ch West Ch

Express Ch
Drop Add
I/O
West Ch East Ch

Figure 143 C-OAD-B-1-XX-S block diagram


3.6.5.1

Description

This board (C-OAD-B-1-XX-S) is used to add and drop only ONE channel per direction in the
Bi-directional CWDM system. A west added/dropped channel is to/from a WLA board and an east
added/dropped channel is to/from a WLA board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD
board.
The OSC 1310nm signals (including east and west directions) are also added and dropped by this
board. The east/west added OSC signals come from the east/west OSC modules and the east/west
dropped OSC signals are sent to the east/west OSC modules.
There are 4 types of Bi-directional C-OAD boards. The wavelengths are defined as in the following
table.
There is only one 2-channel C-OAD module (one add & drop channel for each direction) in the
board.
Table 81
Number (XX)
Add/Drop Channels (nm)

ED

01

C-OAD modules for bi-directional application


4755
4957
5159
1470,1550
1490,1570
1510,1590

5361
1530,1610

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

175/259

3.6.5.2

Optical characteristics

Table 82
C-OAD-B-1-XX-S optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
I/O<->Exp Ch I/O (Max)
1.5
dB
I/O->DROP (Max)
1.8
dB
ADD->I/O (Max)
1.8
dB
Insertion loss (I/O->OSC Drop, OSC Add->I/O)(Max)
2
dB
Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

176/259

3.6.5.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

S-E

East OSC Tx in
East OSC Rx out

S-W

West OSC Tx in
West OSC Rx out
Line I/O 2
Line I/O 1

YY

West YY nm signal add


West YY nm signal drop

ZZ

East ZZ signal add


East ZZ signal drop
Express signal I/O 2
Express signal I/O 1

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 144 Front panel of C-OAD-B-1-XX-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

177/259

3.6.5.4

Front panel wiring

Table 83
Name
East OSC Tx in
East OSC Rx out
West OSC Tx in
West OSC Rx out
Line I/O 2
Line I/O 1
West YY nm signal add
West YY nm signal drop
East ZZ nm signal add
East ZZ nm signal drop
Express signal I/O 2
Express signal I/O 1

Front panel wiring of C-OAD-B-1-XX-S board


Signal
East Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
East Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
West Supervision transmission input signal (from OSC board)
West Supervision reception output signal (to OSC board)
Line signal 2 (from/to line)
Line signal 1 (from/to line)
West YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
Express signal I/O 2 add/drop (connected with express signal I/O 1)
Express signal I/O 1 add/drop

N.B.

(YY, ZZ) is one of the CWDM wavelengths combinations [(1470, 1550), (1490, 1570),
(1510, 1590), (1530, 1610)].

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 84
Meaning of C-OAD-B-1-XX-S board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

178/259

3.6.6

C-OAD-B-1-XX

Line

Line

OADM

Drop
Add Express Ch
I/O
East Ch West Ch

Express Ch Drop
Add
I/O
West Ch East Ch

Figure 145 C-OAD-B-1-XX block diagram


3.6.6.1

Description

This board (C-OAD-B-1-XX) is used to add and drop only ONE channel per direction in the
Bi-directional CWDM system. A west added/dropped channel is to/from a WLA board and an east
added/dropped channel is to/from a WLA board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD
board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is NOT added and dropped by this board.
There are 4 types of Bi-directional C-OAD boards; the wavelengths are defined the same as in Table
81.
There is only one 2-channel C-OAD module (one add & drop channel for each direction) in the
board.
3.6.6.2

Optical characteristics
Table 85
C-OAD-B-1-XX optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
IN<->Exp Ch OUT (Max)
1
dB
IN->DROP (Max)
1.3
dB
ADD->OUT (Max)
1.3
dB
Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

179/259

3.6.6.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

S-E

S-W

Line I/O 2
Line I/O 1
YY

West YY nm signal add


West YY nm signal drop

ZZ

East ZZ signal add


East ZZ signal drop
Express signal I/O 2
Express signal I/O 1

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 146 Front panel of C-OAD-B-1-XX board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

180/259

3.6.6.4

Front panel wiring


Table 86
Name

Line I/O 2
Line I/O 1
West YY nm signal add
West YY nm signal drop
East ZZ nm signal add
East ZZ nm signal drop
Express signal I/O 2
Express signal I/O 1

Front panel wiring of C-OAD-B-1-XX board


Signal
Line signal 2 (from/to line)
Line signal 1 (from/to line)
West YY nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West YY nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East ZZ nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
Express signal I/O 2 add/drop (connected with express signal I/O 1)
Express signal I/O 1 add/drop

N.B.

(YY, ZZ) is one of the CWDM wavelengths combinations [(1470, 1550), (1490, 1570),
(1510, 1590), (1530, 1610)].

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 87
Meaning of C-OAD-B-1-XX board front panel LEDs
Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

181/259

3.7 OADM2 units (C-OAD2)


The following C-OAD2 boards are used:
UNIDIRECTIONAL 1 Add & Drop C-OAD2 with OSC: C-OAD2-E-U-1-XX-S
UNIDIRECTIONAL 1 Add & Drop C-OAD2 without OSC: C-OAD2-U-1-XX
UNIDIRECTIONAL 2 Add & Drop C-OAD2 with OSC: C-OAD2-E-U-2-XXXX-S
UNIDIRECTIONAL 2 Add & Drop C-OAD2 without OSC: C-OAD2-U-2-XXXX
UNIDIRECTIONAL 4 Add & Drop C-OAD2 with OSC: C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S
UNIDIRECTIONAL 4 Add & Drop C-OAD2 without OSC: C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX
3.7.1

C-OAD2-E-U-1-XX-S
Drop Express Ch
Channel Output

PIN AMP

Add
Express Ch
Channel
Input

OADM
X1

5%
West to East
in

5:95 TAP

95%

1310nm Filter
O1

West to East
out

1310nm Filter
O2

Drop OSC

Add OSC

Add OSC

Drop OSC

East to West
out

1310nm Filter
O4

1310nm Filter
O3

95%

5:95 TAP

East to West
in

5%

OADM
X2

Add Express Ch
Channel
Input

PIN AMP

Express Ch Drop
Output Channel

Figure 147 C-OAD2-E-U-1-XX-S block diagram

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

182/259

3.7.1.1

Description

This board (C-OAD2-E-U-1-XX-S) is used to add and drop ONE Channel per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system; the added/dropped channel is to/from the WLA (or OCC10, 2XGE-FC,
C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD2 board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is also added/dropped by this board. The dropped OSC signal is sent to the
OSC board; the added OSC signal comes from the OSC board.
All channels can be added and dropped. There are 8 different 1-channel C-OAD2 boards according
to the different wavelengths; the wavelengths are defined as in the following table.
Table 88
1-channel C-OAD2 module for unidirectional application
Number (XX)
4747
4949
5151
5353
5555
5757
5959
Add/Drop Channels (nm) 1470
1490
1510
1530
1550
1570
1590

6161
1610

There are two OADM modules (one OADM module for each direction) in the board.
At each receiving direction, a 5:95 TAP is used to split the line signal into two channels. One (95%) is
sent to the 1310nm filter splitter; the other (5%) is sent to a PIN & amplification circuit for LOS
detection.
The front panel and front panel wiring are the same as C-OAD-E-U-1-XX-S unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

183/259

3.7.2

C-OAD2-U-1-XX
Drop Express Ch
Channel Output

Add
Express Ch
Channel
Input

PIN AMP
OADM
X1

5%
West to East
in

5:95 TAP

95%

West to East
out
95%

East to West
out

OADM
X2

5:95 TAP

East to West
in

5%

PIN AMP

Add Express Ch
Channel
Input

Express Ch Drop
Output Channel

Figure 148 C-OAD2-U-1-XX block diagram


3.7.2.1

Description

This board (C-OAD2-U-1-XX) is used to add and drop ONE Channel per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system and the added/dropped channel is to/from the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD2 board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is NOT added and dropped by this board.
All channels can be added and dropped. There are 8 different 1-channel C-OAD2 boards according
to the different wavelengths; the wavelengths are defined the same as in Table 88.
There are two OADM modules (one OADM module for each direction) in the C-OAD2 board.
At each receiving direction, a 5:95 TAP is used to split the line signal into two channels. One (95%) is
sent to the OADM module; the other (5%) is sent to a PIN & amplification circuit for LOS detection.
The front panel and front panel wiring are the same as C-OAD-U-1-XX unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

184/259

3.7.3

C-OAD2-E-U-2-XXXX-S
Drop
Ch1

Drop
Ch2

Express Ch
Output

PIN AMP

Express Ch
Input

Add
Ch1

Add
Ch2

OADM
X1

5%

5:95 TAP

West to East
in

95%

1310nm Filter
O1

1310nm Filter
O2

West to East
out

Drop
OSC

Add
OSC

Add
OSC

Drop
OSC

1310nm Filter
O3

East to West
out

1310nm Filter
O4

95%

5:95 TAP

East to West
in

5%

OADM
X2

Add
Ch1

Add
Ch2

Express Ch
Input

Express Ch
Output

PIN AMP

Drop Drop
Ch2 Ch1

Figure 149 C-OAD2-E-U-2-XXXX-S block diagram


3.7.3.1

Description

This board (C-OAD2-E-U-2-XXXX-S) is used to add and drop TWO Channels per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system and the added/dropped channels are to/from the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD2 board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is also added/dropped by this board. The dropped OSC signal is sent to the
OSC board; the added OSC signal comes from the OSC board.
There are 4 types of 2-channel C-OAD2 boards; the wavelengths are defined as the following table.
There are two OADM modules (one OADM modules for each direction) in the C-OAD2 board.
At each receiving direction, a 5:95 TAP is used to split the line signal into two channels. One (95%) is
sent to the 1310nm filter splitter; the other (5%) is sent to a PIN & amplification circuit for LOS
detection.
Table 89
2-channel C-OAD2 module for unidirectional application
Number (XX)
47474949
51515353
55555757
59596161
Add/Drop Channels (nm)
1470,1490
1510,1530
1550,1570
1590,1610
The front panel and front panel wiring are the same as in a C-OAD-E-U-2-XXXX-S unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

185/259

3.7.4

C-OAD2-U-2-XXXX
Drop
Ch1

Drop
Express Ch
Ch2
Output

Express Ch Add
Ch1
Input

Add
Ch2

PIN AMP
OADM
X1

5%
West to East
in

5:95 TAP

95%

West to East
out
95%

East to West
out

5:95 TAP

OADM
X2

East to West
in

5%

PIN AMP

Add
Ch1

Add
Ch2

Express Ch
Input

Express Ch
Output

Drop Drop
Ch2 Ch1

Figure 150 C-OAD2-U-2-XXXX block diagram


3.7.4.1

Description

This board (C-OAD2-U-2-XXXX) is used to add and drop TWO Channels per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system and the added/dropped channels are to/from the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD2 board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is NOT added/dropped by this board.
There are 4 types of 2-channel C-OAD2 boards. The wavelengths are defined the same as in Table
89.
There are two OADM modules (one OADM modules for each direction) in the C-OAD2 board.
At each receiving direction, a 5:95 TAP is used to split the line signal into two channels. One (95%) is
sent to the OADM module; the other (5%) is sent to a PIN & amplification circuit for LOS detection.
The front panel and front panel wiring are the same as in a C-OAD-U-2-XXXX unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

186/259

3.7.5

C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S
Drop
Ch14

Express Ch
Output

PIN AMP

Express Ch
Input

Add
Ch14

OADM
X1

5%

5:95 TAP

West to East
in

95%

1310nm Filter
O1

1310nm Filter
O2

West to East
out

Drop OSC

Add OSC
Drop OSC

Add OSC

1310nm Filter
O3

East to West
out

1310nm Filter
O4

95%

5:95 TAP

East to West
in

5%
OADM
X2

Add
Ch14

Express Ch
Input

Express Ch
Output

PIN AMP

Drop
Ch14

Figure 151 C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S block diagram


3.7.5.1

Description

This board (C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S) is used to add and drop FOUR Channels per direction in
the unidirectional CWDM system and the added/dropped channels are to/from the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S
board.
The OSC 1310nm signal is also added/dropped by this board. The dropped OSC signal is sent to the
OSC board; the added OSC signal comes from the OSC board.
There are 2 types of 4-channel C-OAD2 boards; the wavelengths are defined in the following table.
The XXXXXXXX can be the values listed in the following table.
Table 90
4-channel C-OAD2 module for unidirectional application
Number (XXXXXXXX)
4747494951515353
5555575759596161
Add/Drop Channels (nm)
1470,1490,1510,1530
1550,1570,1590,1610
Thus there are two kinds of C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

187/259

3.7.5.2

Optical characteristics

The C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S units add & drop channels sequence is defined by the following
table.
Table 91
Add & Drop Channels Sequence
Add & Drop Wavelength (nm)
Channel
C-OAD2-E-U-4-4747494951515353-S C-OAD2-E-U-4-5555575759596161-S Number
1470
1550
1
1490
1570
2
1510
1590
3
1530
1610
4
The optical characteristics of the board are as follows:
Table 92

C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board optical characteristics


Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
IN->Exp Ch OUT (Max)
2.7
dB
Exp Ch IN->OUT (Max)
2.2
dB
In->CH1 Drop (Max)
2.8
dB
In->CH2 Drop (Max)
2.5
dB
In->CH3 Drop (Max)
2.2
dB
In->CH4 Drop (Max)
1.9
dB
CH1 Add->Out (Max)
1.4
dB
CH2 Add->Out (Max)
1.7
dB
CH3 Add->Out (Max)
2.0
dB
CH4 Add->Out (Max)
2.3
dB
IN->OSC DROP (Max)
1.5
dB
OSC ADD->OUT (Max)
1
dB
Temperature Specs
Value
Unit
Operating temperature
070

Storage temperature
-40+85

Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

188/259

3.7.5.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure
LED

East OSC add


East OSC drop

S-E

West OSC add


West OSC drop

S-W

Line East in
Line East out
East A nm signal add
East A nm signal drop
East B nm signal add
East B nm signal drop
East C nm signal add
East C nm signal drop
East D nm signal add
East D nm signal drop
East express signal add
East express signal drop

Line West in
Line West out

A-E

A-W

West A nm signal add


West A nm signal drop

B-E

B-W

West B nm signal add


West B nm signal drop

C-E

C-W

West C nm signal add


West C nm signal drop

D-E

D-W

West D nm signal add


West D nm signal drop

West express signal add


West express signal drop

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 152 Front panel of C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

189/259

3.7.5.4

Front panel wiring

Table 93
Name
OSC Add (East)
OSC Drop (East)
OSC Add (West)
OSC Drop (West)
Input (East)
Output (East)
Add A (East)
Drop A (East)
Add B (East)
Drop B (East)
Add C (East)
Drop C (East)
Add D (East)
Drop D (East)
Express Ch In (East)
Express Ch Out (East)
Input (West)
Output (West)
Add A (West)
Drop A (West)
Add B (West)
Drop B (West)
Add C (West)
Drop C (West)
Add D (West)
Drop D (West)
Express Ch In (West)
Express Ch Out (West)

Front panel wiring of C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board


Signal
East OSC signal input (From OSC board)
East OSC signal output (to OSC board)
West OSC signal input (From OSC board)
West OSC signal output (to OSC board)
East Line signal input (from line)
East Line signal output (to line)
East A nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East A nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East B nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East B nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East C nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East C nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East D nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East D nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East express signal input
East express signal output
West Line signal input (from line)
West Line signal output (to line)
West A nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West A nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West B nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West B nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West C nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West C nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West D nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West D nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West express signal input
West express signal output

N.B.

(A, B, C and D) can respectively be (1470, 1490, 1510 and 1530) or (1550, 1570, 1590
and 1610).

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 94

ED

01

Meaning of C-OAD2-E-U-4-XXXXXXXX-S board front panel LEDs


Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

190/259

3.7.6

C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX
Drop
Ch14

PIN AMP

Express Ch
Output

Express Ch
Input

Add
Ch14

OADM
X1

5%

5:95 TAP

West to East
in

95%

West to East
out

95%

East to West
out

5:95 TAP

East to West
in

5%

OADM
X2

Add
Ch14

Express Ch
Input

Express Ch
Output

PIN AMP

Drop
Ch14

Figure 153 C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX block diagram


3.7.6.1

Description

This board (C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX) is used to add and drop FOUR Channels per direction in the
unidirectional CWDM system and the added/dropped channels are to/from the WLA (or OCC10,
2XGE-FC, C-4xANY) board. The other channels are passed through the C-OAD2 board.
There are 2 types of 4-channel C-OAD2 boards; the wavelengths are defined in the following table.
There are two OADM modules (one OADM modules for each direction) in the C-OAD2 board.
The XXXXXXXX can be the values listed in the following table.
Table 95
4-channel C-OAD2 modules for unidirectional application
Number (XXXXXXXX)
4747494951515353
5555575759596161
Add/Drop Channels (nm)
1470,1490,1510,1530
1550,1570,1590,1610
Thus there are two kinds of C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX boards.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

191/259

3.7.6.2

Optical characteristics

The C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX units add & drop channels sequence is defined by the following table:
Table 96
Add & Drop channels Sequence
Add & Drop Wavelength (nm)
C-OAD2-U-4-4747494951515353
C-OAD2-U-4-5555575759596161
1470
1550
1490
1570
1510
1590
1530
1610

Channel
Number
1
2
3
4

The optical characteristics of the board are as follows:


Table 97
C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board optical characteristics
Insertion Losses
Value
Unit
IN->Exp Ch OUT (Max)
2.2
dB
Exp Ch IN->OUT (Max)
1.7
dB
In->CH1 Drop (Max)
2.3
dB
In->CH2 Drop (Max)
2.0
dB
In->CH3 Drop (Max)
1.7
dB
In->CH4 Drop (Max)
1.4
dB
CH1 Add->Out (Max)
0.9
dB
CH2 Add->Out (Max)
1.2
dB
CH3 Add->Out (Max)
1.5
dB
CH4 Add->Out (Max)
1.8
dB
Temperature Specs
Value
Unit
Operating temperature
070

Storage temperature
-40+85

Fiber Specs
Type
Fiber type
0.9/2mm SMF28
Connector type
MU
Reflectance
Value
Unit
All input ports (Max)
-40
dB

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

192/259

3.7.6.3

Front panel description

Extraction
Handle

Hardware Failure LED

Line East in
Line East out

Line West in
Line West out

East A nm signal add


East A nm signal drop

A-E

A-W

West A nm signal add


West A nm signal drop

East B nm signal add


East B nm signal drop

B-E

B-W

West B nm signal add


West B nm signal drop

East C nm signal add


East C nm signal drop

C-E

C-W

West C nm signal add


West C nm signal drop

East D nm signal add


East D nm signal drop

D-E

D-W

West D nm signal add


West D nm signal drop

West express signal add


West express signal drop

East express signal add


East express signal drop

Optical Safety
Label
Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Extraction
Handle

Figure 154 Front panel of C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

193/259

3.7.6.4

Front panel wiring

Table 98
Name
Input (East)
Output (East)
Add A (East)
Drop A (East)
Add B (East)
Drop B (East)
Add C (East)
Drop C (East)
Add D (East)
Drop D (East)
Express Ch In (East)
Express Ch Out (East)
Input (West)
Output (West)
Add A (West)
Drop A (West)
Add B (West)
Drop B (West)
Add C (West)
Drop C (West)
Add D (West)
Drop D (West)
Express Ch In (West)
Express Ch Out (West)

Front panel wiring of C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board


Signal
East Line signal input (from line)
East Line signal output (to line)
East A nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East A nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East B nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East B nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East C nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East C nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East D nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
East D nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
East express signal input
East express signal output
West Line signal input (from line)
West Line signal output (to line)
West A nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West A nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West B nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West B nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West C nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West C nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West D nm signal add (from corresponding transponder)
West D nm signal drop (to corresponding transponder)
West express signal input
West express signal output

N.B.

(A, B, C and D) can respectively be (1470, 1490, 1510 and 1530) or (1550, 1570, 1590
and 1610).

N.B.

East means from west to east, while West means from east to west.

LEDs signification
Table 99

Meaning of C-OAD2-U-4-XXXXXXXX board front panel LEDs


Red
LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
Orange
button, it turns Orange.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

194/259

3.8 ESC-LC board


The ESC-LC is low cost ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) and integrated function of I-LINK-M. It is
the hardware platform designed to support the Equipment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf
Controller (SC) functions.
The EC functions are the processing activities concerning the Virtual Equipment Control Element
(VECE) function:
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)
Message Communication Function (MCF)
The SC functions are the processing activities concerning the Physical Equipment Control Element
(PECE) function:
Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF)
Basic Process Control Function (BPCF)
It provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and
management and configuration provisioning.
The ESC-LC consists in a double processor board. It is mainly composed of:
An ESC-LC mother board
A daughter board achieving the EC function and SC function in two processors.
A non-volatile mass storage device PCMCIA 2.1 compatible (compact flash card).
Both EC and SC functions are realized using a daughter card. They are plugged on the ESC-LC
mother board. The daughter card is developed in order to provide a common HW (and SW) platform
for different applications requiring a Shelf Controller (SC) function. The processors used are members
of Motorola MPC860 family.
Various kinds of serial communication channels and parallel I/O ports for alarm & status signals are
provided by the ESC-LC card.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

195/259

3.8.1

Front panel description

URG LED(Red)
NURG LED(Red)
ATTD LED(Yellow)
ABN LED(Yellow)
IND LED(Yellow)

URG/SC
NUR/EC
ATD/S1
ABN/S2
IND/S3
ACO
LAT
RST

SC (Red/Green)
EC (Red/Green)
Slave 1(Yellow)
Slave 2(Yellow)
Slave 3(Yellow)
ALARM Cut Off Push Button
Lamp Test Push Button
RESET Push Button

CONN S1

I-LINK Slave1 connector

CONN S2

I-LINK Slave2 Connector

CONN S3

I-LINK Slave3 Connector

CRAFT

F Interface Connector

SC_DBG Interface RJ45

EC_DBG Interface RJ45

Figure 155 Front panel of ESC-LC board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

196/259

3.8.1.1

Front panel connectors


Table 100

Name
I-LINK Slave 1
I-LINK Slave 2
I-LINK Slave 3
F Interface
DBG_SC
DBG_EC
3.8.1.2

LEDs signification
Name
URG
NURG
ATTD
ABN
IND
SC
EC
S1
S2
S3

N.B.

Front panel connectors of the ESC board


Type
RS485 connector (I-LINK interface) (see section 2.7.2.6)
RS485 connector (I-LINK interface) (see section 2.7.2.6)
RS485 connector (I-LINK interface) (see section 2.7.2.6)
SUB-D 9 pins connector (see section 2.7.2.4)
RJ45 connector (see section2.7.2.5)
RJ45 connector (see section2.7.2.5)

Table 101 Meaning of ESC front panel LEDs signification


LED Color
Meaning
Red
Critical or major alarm appears.
Red
Major alarm appears.
Yellow
After pressing ACO or LAT button.
Abnormal condition appears or after pressing LAT
Yellow
button.
Yellow
Non-alarmed event is declared.
Green: SC/EC is in normal operation.
Red: hardware failure on SC/EC.
Green, Red, Yellow
Yellow: SC/EC is booting or restarting, or after
pressing the LAT button.
Yellow

The slave shelf is powered on and the I-LINK


connection is correct.

Before the communication between EC and SC is established:

When the RST push button is pressed, EC & SC LEDs status doesnt change.
When the SC is restarted and the communication between EC and SC is not established, the EC LED is
red and the SC LED is green.
N.B.

When the communication between EC & SC is re-established, both EC & SC LEDs are green.

N.B.

On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S), the application of the
URGENT (URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different
way; the relation between this two terminology is explained in the following table.

Table 102

Relation between alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the ESC-LC LEDs and ETSI market rack (TRU)
Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and Alarm severity terminology used for ESC
O.S.
LEDs and for TRU in the rack
CRITICAL or MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
INDETERMINATE (not used)

ED

01

URG, T*URG, T*RURG


T*NURG, T*RNURG
INDICATIVE
-

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

197/259

3.9 C-4xANY card

2.5G
Signal

Figure 156 C-4xANY block diagram


3.9.1

Description

The 4xANY unit is a TDM concentrator that enables to the multiplexing in the time domain of up to
4 Low Bit-rate signals into one at 2.5 Gbit/s:
4 x Fast Ethernet
4 x FDDI
4 x ESCON
4 x Digital Video
4 x STM-1
3 x STM-4
2 x Gigabit Ethernet
2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
Some mixes are also possible:

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

198/259

3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 1 x STM-4


2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 2 x STM-4
2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 1 x (FC or GbE or FICON)
1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM-1) + 1 x STM-4 +1 x (FC or GbE or FICON)
2 x (FC or GbE or FICON)
The architecture of the TDM concentrator board is based on the concept of virtual concatenation, and
on the mapping of SDH on OTN:
The data traffic is packed into VC-4 structures (virtually concatenated).
The VC-4s are groomed into a STM-16 structure.
The next figure explains the allocation of the VC-4.

The board is divided into:

Figure 157 VC-4 allocation

One mother board


One daughter board
1 to 4 drawers plugged into the mother or daughter board (2 on each one).
The board consists essentially of:
Slots for bi-directional client optical interfaces
One 2.5 Gbit/s transceiver
FPGAs for the mapping function:
Two dedicated to the concatenation into virtual VC-4 structures (2xANY)
One dedicated to the STM-16 frame termination (Pontaccio)
One STM-6 regenerator section termination (Passtru)
One alarm and control unit (Mascon)
Receivers and transmitters can be locked to either the received clock or the local clock:
Default configuration: Tx locked to the local clock and Rx locked to the received clock.
Loopback configuration. Loopback and Continue managed.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

199/259

Three different kinds of drawers are provided:


High frequency 1310nm optical interface drawers (Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel), which can
be plugged only into the ports #3 & #4 (HF_1310_DRAWER).
STM-1/4 drawers, which can be plugged into any slots. But, the STM-4 Bit rate can only be set for
ports #3 and #4 (SDH-SONET_1310_DRAWER).
Particular Case: For the 3 STM-4 configuration, slot #1 is exceptionally occupied by a STM-4
bit rate.
Low frequency drawers (Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, Digital Video) with 1310nm optical
interfaces, which can be plugged in any slots (LF_1310_DRAWER).

High frequency drawers are equipped with 850nm detectors and lasers. The following rules for
the position of these drawers are only imposed due to the high frequency nature of the drawer
(HF_850_DRAWER).
Low frequency drawers are equipped with 850nm detectors and lasers. The rules followed for the

position of these drawers are only imposed due to the low frequency nature of the drawer
(LF_850_DRAWER).

Furthermore, a limited number of configurations of drawers can be provided. Rules must be followed:
If High Frequency drawer is plugged into ports #3, port #1 must be non-provisioned.
If High Frequency drawer is plugged into ports #4, port #2 must be non-provisioned.
For each 2xANY, the following table lists the allowed configurations. Configurations for the two
2xANY are independent.
Table 103
2xANY #1
Drawer #1
Not Provisioned
Low Frequency / STM-1
Not Provisioned
Low Frequency / STM-1
STM-4

Allowed drawers association in each 2xANY


2xANY #2
Drawer #3
Drawer #2
Drawer #4
High Frequency
Not Provisioned
High Frequency
Low Frequency / STM-1
Low Frequency / STM-1
Low Frequency / STM-1
/ STM-4
/ STM-4
High Frequency / Low
Low Frequency / STM-1
Frequency / STM-1 /
Low Frequency / STM-1
/ STM-4
STM-4
High Frequency / Low
Low Frequency / STM-1
Not Provisioned
Frequency / STM-1 /
/ STM-4
STM-4
STM-4
Not Provisioned
STM-4

Any couple (DRW#1; DRW#3) can be associated to any couple (DRW#2; DRW#4) except for the last
Line (3 x STM-4 configuration is fixed for the 4 drawers).

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

200/259

The following table shows the allowed data type for each kind of drawer:

Other
FastEthernet100
ESCON
DigitalVideo
FiberChannel
GigabitEthernet
FICON
FDDI
STM-1
STM-4
3.9.2

Table 104
LF_1310_
Drawer
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N

Client Data Type configuration for drawer


LF_850_
HF_1310_
HF_850_
Drawer
Drawer
Drawer
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

STM-1/4_
Drawer
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y*

C-4xANY optical characteristics

User Rx (1 to 4 on the board)


Table 105

User Rx specification 1310nm


Multi-mode
62.5 / 125 m

Fiber type
High Frequency
Sensitivity @ BER = 10-10

-20

dBm

Overload @ BER = 10

-3

dBm

Maximum optical path penalty

NA

dB

Maximum receiver reflectance

12

dB

Sensitivity @ BER = 10-10

-28

dBm

Overload @ BER = 10

-8

dBm

Maximum optical path penalty

NA

dB

Maximum receiver reflectance

dB

Sensitivity @ BER = 10-10

-28

dBm

Overload @ BER = 10

-8

dBm

Maximum optical path penalty

NA

dB

Maximum receiver reflectance

12.5

dB

-10

STM-1, STM-4
-10

Low Frequency
-10

User Tx (1 to 4 on the board)

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

201/259

Table 106
Fiber type

User Rx specification 1310nm


Single-mode
High Frequency

Maximum RMS width

nm

NA

dB

Min: -12; Max:-3

dBm

dB

Shutdown time

<5

ms

Re-activation time

<30

ms

Maximum RMS width

2.5

nm

Minimum side mode suppression ratio

NA

dB

Min: -15; Max: -8

dBm

Minimum extinction ratio

8.2

dB

Shutdown time

<5

ms

Re-activation time

<30

ms

Maximum RMS width

2.5

nm

Minimum side mode suppression ratio

NA

dB

Min: -15; Max: -8

dBm

Minimum extinction ratio

8.2

dB

Shutdown time

<5

ms

Re-activation time

<30

ms

Minimum side mode suppression ratio


Optical output power
Minimum extinction ratio

STM-1, STM-4

Optical output power

Low Frequency

Optical output power

In the following table, the specifications of optical ports used in 850nm drawers are displayed.
User Rx (1 to 4 on the board)
Table 107
Fiber type

User Rx specification (850nm)


Multi-mode, 62.5 / 125 m
High Frequency

Sensitivity @ BER = 10

-17

dBm

dBm

Maximum optical path penalty

NA

dB

Maximum receiver reflectance

-12

dB

-17

dBm

dBm

Maximum optical path penalty

NA

dB

Maximum receiver reflectance

12

dB

-10

Overload @ BER = 10-10

Low Frequency
Sensitivity @ BER = 10-10
Overload @ BER = 10

ED

01

-10

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

202/259

User Tx (1 to 4 on the board)


Table 108
Fiber type

User Tx specification (850nm)


Multi-mode, 62.5 / 125 m
High Frequency

Maximum RMS width

30

nm

Minimum side mode suppression ratio

NA

dB

Min: -9.5; Max: -1.5

dBm

dB

Shutdown time

<0.5

ms

Re-activation time

<300

ms

Maximum RMS width

30

nm

Minimum side mode suppression ratio

NA

dB

Min: -9.5; Max: -1.5

dBm

dB

Shutdown time

<0.5

ms

Re-activation time

<300

ms

Optical output power


Minimum extinction ratio

Low Frequency

Optical output power


Minimum extinction ratio

The laser state of drawer should be set forced on when setting local loopback.
On the CWDM side of the C-4xANY board, I16, S16.1, L16.1, L16.2, I16_DDM, S16.1_DDM, PIN
and APD can be set. Please refer to chapter 3.1.2 for the optical parameters.
In R3.2A, B1 monitoring can be performed on the line side of C-4xANY board. But the J0 processing
is not supported.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

203/259

3.9.3

Front panel description

CWDM signal

Figure 158 Front panel of C-4xANY board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

204/259

Name
PWR
OOS
RXA

TXA

ED

01

Table 109 Meaning of C-4xANY card front panel LEDs


LED Color
Meaning
Green
This LED is ON when the power supply is in range of standard.
Yellow
LED is on when the board is un-configured or mismatching.
Rx Abnormal: problem on the receive side.
Board is un-configured or mismatching.
Yellow
ILOS on STM-16 side
ILOS on drawers
Managed by the SW.
Tx Abnormal: problem on the transmit side. Managed by the SW.
LED is on when:
Yellow
Drawer of Line SFP module laser is forced off.
Tx Fault alarm is present.
Hardware Failure:
Green
Green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure.
Orange
Orange when the board is in downloading state or after pressing LAT button.
Red when the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (or on the power
Red
supply alarms).

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

205/259

3.10 OSC unit


The OSC board receives data from the ESC-LC board, and transmits it to the optical fiber line; On the
other hand, OSC board receives data from the optical fiber line and transmits it to the ESC-LC board.
The supervision unit is composed of two optical transceivers (OSC channel receiver and transmitter)
and a FPGA dedicated to the supervision frames management and OSC alarms and status collection.
Thus the OSC board can deal with two data communication channels (DCC1 and DCC2), one for
each direction.
3.10.1 Description
For this release, the functionalities supported by the OSC board are the following:
Management of one or two bidirectional supervision streams at 2048 Kbit/s. For Line terminal
applications. There is one supervision stream. For back to back or OADM applications, there are
two.
Management of Data Communication Channels DCC1 and DCC2.
The configurations of Line Terminal or back to back terminals and OADM are done by software.
3.10.2 Functional description of the configurations
As described in the two following figures, the data of OSC channel at 1310nm are sent to the matrix in
a 2 Mbit/s signal to the supervision frame management functional block. This block generates one/or
two TDM signals according to the NE configuration.
SFP
module

Tx 1
optical

transmitter

Rx 1
optical
receiver

Matrix

C-MDX
or C-OAD
board

Supervision frame
management
TDM1

ESC-LC
board

Figure 159 OSC board in Line Terminal configuration

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

206/259

West

C-MDX
or C-OAD
board

East

OSC2
1310nm

SFP module

SFP
module

Tx 2
optical
transmitter

Tx 1
optical
transmitter

Rx 2
optical
receiver

Rx 1
optical
receiver

Matrix

OSC1
1310nm

C-MDX
or C-OAD
board

Supervision frame
management
TDM2

TDM1

ESC-LC board

Figure 160 OSC board in OADM or back to back configuration


3.10.3 Optical characteristics
Receiver:
Table 110 Rx specification
Fiber type
9/125 Single-mode
Sensitivity @ BER=10-10
-35 dBm
Overload @ BER=10-10
-10 dBm
Maximum receiver reflectance
-14 dB
Transmitter:
Table 111 Tx specification
Fiber type
9/125 Single-mode
Maximum -20 dB width
1nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio
30 dB
Min: -5 dBm
Optical Output power
Max: 0 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio
10 dB

ED

N.B.

The optical characteristics of these WDM interfaces correspond to the ones of the L-1.1
interfaces.

N.B.

All the figures are EOL.

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

207/259

3.10.4 Front panel description


Hardware failure LED

OSC2
Tx

OSC2
Rx

Electrostatic Discharge
Label

OSC1
Tx

OSC1
Rx

Extraction hole

Optical Safety
Label

Figure 161 Front panel of OSC board


LEDs signification
Table 112
Red
Green
Orange

ED

01

Meaning of OSC board front panel LEDs


LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green when board is configured correctly. It turns Orange when
in downloading state or after pressing LAT button.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

208/259

3.11 OMSP unit


OMSP performs optical multiplex section protection.
50/50 Splitter
Rx in

Tx out line 1
Tx out line 2

F1

Tx out

Optical
Switch

F4

N.B.

F2

Rx in line 1

F3

Rx in line 2

The F4 port of optical switch is not used.


Figure 162 OMSP block diagram

3.11.1 Description
An optical signal is received on Rx link coming from the C-MDX/C-OAD board and is split into two
channels (channel 1 and 2) to send towards the CWDM line in the board by a 3dB splitter.
The two optical signals received on CWDM line Rx link are sent to an optical switch. Under the control
of board logic, the optical switch will select one channel optical signal to send towards the
C-MDX/C-OAD board.
The LOS detection is made on each of the two CWDM line RX input channels.
Both splitter and optical switch are double-windows (12701350nm, 14601620nm) optical
components.
3.11.2 Optical characteristics
Symbol

ED

West to east

IL

East to west

IL

Table 113 Absolute maximum ratings


Parameter
Value
Insertion Loss
IL (Min)
IL (Max)
4.0*
IL (Min)
IL (Max) @ 1270 to
1.9*
1350nm
IL (Max) @ 1460 to
2.3*
1620nm

Unit
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB

Including connectors and splices

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

209/259

3.11.3 Front panel description


Hardware failure LED

Rx in
line 1

Electrostatic Discharge
Label

Rx in Tx out Tx out
line 2 line 1 line 2

Tx out

Rx in

Extraction hole

Optical Safety
Label

Figure 163 Front panel of OMSP board


3.11.4 Front panel wiring
Table 114

Front panel wiring of OMSP board


Signal
CWDM line input signal 1 (from line)
CWDM line input signal 2 (from line)
CWDM line output signal 1 (to line)
CWDM line output signal 2 (to line)
Selected optical signal output (to C-MDX or C-MDX)
Protected optical signal input (from C-MDX or C-MDX)

Name
Rx in line 1
Rx in line 2
Tx out line 1
Tx out line 2
Tx out
Rx in
LEDs signification

Table 115
Red
Green
Orange

ED

01

Meaning of OMSP board front panel LEDs


LED is Red before software configuring is finished and becomes
Green when board is configured correctly. After pressing LAT
button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

210/259

3.12 I-LINK-S unit


The I-LINK Slave is designated to connect the SPI bus from the Slave shelves only to the ESC-LC unit
only provided in the Master shelf.

SPI BUS
RS485 transcievers

BACK
RS485
Connector

Alarm & Control


PANEL
Card
Presence bus

RS485 transcievers
and Card Presence
Identification

Figure 164 I-LINK-S block diagram


3.12.1 Description
The I-LINK Slave is designated to be plugged into slot 1 of the slave shelf. The link to the SPI bus is
made via an interface RS485.
The I-LINK Slave unit can be inserted into a shelf (hot insertion) without causing any damage to itself
or to any other unit.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

211/259

3.12.2 Front panel description

Extraction
Handle
SP

PWR

Always off
Always off
Always off
Power supply alarm LED
Hardware failure LED

Connector for master shelf

Extraction
Handle

Figure 165 Front panel of I-LINK-S board

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

212/259

3.12.2.1

Front panel connectors


Table 116

Front panel connectors of the I-LINK-S board


Type
RS485 connector (see section 2.7.2.6)

Name
3.12.2.2

LEDs signification
Table 117

Name
PWR
HWF

ED

01

Meaning of I-LINK-S front panel LEDs signification


Meaning
LED orange ON if there is an alarm on power supply on board. Otherwise LED
orange off.
Used by SPIDER: The Red LED is turned on (pin set low) by software during software
reset. The Green LED is turned on (pin set low) by software when card configuring is
finished. After pressing LAT button, it turns Orange.

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

213/259

3.13 General user interfaces


Two main functions are supported by vary small units:
Provide the power supply to the other units
Provide the electrical interface to operators
3.13.1 Power Supply Card
Two power supply units are used: a) working and b) protecting. They are located in the slots 7 and 12
of the compact shelf or slot 25 and 48 of the CO shelf. These boards provide some +3.6 V and +5.5
V for service use to all units and a -48/-60 V power supply when needed.
The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is -36 / -72 V.
Front panel Connector: Sub-D 3 poles
LEDs signification
Table 118 Meaning of Power Supply Card LEDs signification
Hardware Failure:
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (or on the power
supply alarms).
ORANGE after pressing LAT button.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

214/259

3.13.2 Power Management Unit (PMU)


The PMU is strictly dedicated to the 1692MSE compact shelf.
It is an external shelf able to feed the compact shelf providing the -48/-60Vdc to the power supply
cards.
Hence the 1692MSE compact shelf can be fed
By the classical -48/-60Vdc provided by the telecom rack,
By the -48V/-60Vdc provided by the PMU, able to deliver this powering from any alternative
voltage source.
The PMU is an external shelf of the same size that the 1692MSE compact shelf, which can be installed
in 19 and 21racks. This additional shelf is 1U high (1U = 44.45mm).
The PMU works in a worldwide environment, which applies to the following requirements:
US requirements: NEBS compliant (115V/ 60Hz),
Europe requirements (230V/ 50Hz).
PSC boards are connected to the rectifiers of the PMU which provide the power.

3.13.2.1

Description

Figure 166 PMU cabling scheme

The PMU architecture is made up of:


2 VAC inputs
2 VDC outputs without fuses
1 battery connection
One control unit
2 rectifiers modules
On DC voltage outputs, no fuses are required because the 1692MSE compact shelf has on his PSC
unit fuses on inputs. The outputs are connected together, so they can protect the DC outputs.
Two rectifiers modules are present in one PMU. Each module is able to supply with power up to 4
stacked 1692MSE compact shelf.
One module enables to supply the 4 stacked shelves. If one module fails, the other one can still supply
the 4 shelves.
The Control Unit must be able to provide the following functions:
Deliver 2 outputs -48/-60Vdc

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

215/259

Manage the battery


Manage Status LEDs.

Figure 167 PMU block diagram


3.13.2.2

Batteries for PMU

Batteries are optional units used with the PMU in order to supply the -48/-60V to the 1692MSE
compact shelf in case of power outage of the alternative power source (100V/115V/220V supply).
Battery units are linked to the Control unit of the PMU by cascading the units.
The first battery gives a temperature measurement of the unit to the PMU so as to generate an alarm
when out of the range.
It is possible to add up to three optional batteries. This depends of the current consumption of the
shelves (150W per battery).
Performance.
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 15 hours with 1 PMU and 1 shelf.
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 60 hours with 1 PMU and 4 shelves.
The battery duration for 150W must be of 3 hours.
Mechanical dimension of each battery: W = 446.02 mm; L = 284 mm; H = 133.35 mm.
Batteries can be inserted in a 19 and 21 (ETSI) rack or put on table.
In Rack Version, the batteries are located below the PMU.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

216/259

Figure 168 Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1692MSE R3.0, rack version
In table version, batteries are located and stacked besides the PMU and 1692MSE compact shelves;
only this configuration is supported since a battery is not likely to hold the full stack of batteries, PMU
and shelves.

Figure 169 Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1692MSE R3.0, table version
The following figure is the front panel of PMU.

Figure 170 PMU front panel

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

217/259

Connectors:
5) Battery connector. It has to be connected to the (optional) back-up battery.
6) Output power connector. Sub-D 3p to be connected to the two PSC(2) cards.
7) Not used in this release.
8) AC input power connector. To be connected to the primary AC power supply (100V/5060Hz,
115V/60Hz, 230V/50Hz)
LEDs signification
Table 119

Name
1)
Green/Red

2)
Green/Red
3)
Green/Red
4)
Green/Red

ED

01

Meaning of PMU LEDs signification


Meaning
MAJOR alarm. The LED is
GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
Both rectifiers are missing or both rectifiers input voltage < 85V rms
Both rectifiers output voltage <38V or >60V
Both rectifiers temperature >55 C or output current < 12A
MINOR alarm. The LED is
GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
One rectifier is missing or one rectifier input voltage < 85V rms
One rectifier output voltage <38V or >60V
Battery present but battery breaker open
BATTERY CONNECTED. The LED is RED if battery connection is failed.
The LED is GREEN if battery is connected.
TEST BATTERY. The LED is RED if test battery is failed.
The LED is GREEN if test battery is OK. The LED is LIT OFF if no battery connected

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

218/259

3.13.3 Housekeeping board (HK)


1692MSE may interface itself with the user's environment and/or another WDM system to build up
operations maintenance.
To allow these exchanges of information, HK (Housekeeping) unit may be mounted in slot 11 of the
compact shelf or slot 36 of the CO shelf. Its main purpose is to:
Send and receive data, to/from master cards via the SPI bus and to/from the user or another
WDM system throughout the protected I/O interface.
Alarms are provided on failed battery and voltages losses.

Figure 171 Block diagram of control HK board


8 housekeeping accesses are provided in both directions (8 inputs and 8 outputs).
Connector: Sub-D 25 pins
LEDs signification
Table 120 Meaning of HK board LEDs signification
Hardware Failure:
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (or on the power
supply alarms).

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

219/259

3.13.4 Rack Alarm Interface board (RAI)


The Remote Alarm Inventory Card receives signals from the ESC-LC and signals from the Bus Alarm
(FAN-CO alarms and PSC/PSC2/PSC3 alarms). This information is sent to the PDU or the TRU card,
and receives alarm signals from the PDU or TRU card to alert the ESC-LC.

Figure 172 Block diagram of RAI unit


The RAI board can be plugged in the slot 9/10 of the compact shelf or slot 37 of the CO shelf.
2 ways of working are available:
For Interfacing with the PDU
The RAI cards in the same rack are linked to each other. And the RAI card in the master shelf is linked

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

220/259

with the PDU.


For Interfacing with the TRU
The same methods can be utilized but, in addition, a direct link between each shelf and the TRU can
be used.
The RAI card inputs are alarms coming from the FAN-CO card, from the PSC and from the Equipment
Controller. Taking the various inputs into account the rack lamps are light on or off.
Electrical characteristics:
OPEN:
Vmax=72 Volts
CLOSE:
Imax=100mA
Voltage difference between Common out and OUT*< 2.5 Volts
Resistance of the closed relay= 300 M.(Max)
Connectors:
SUB-D 9 pins female
RJ11 6pins female
Table 121 Meaning of RAI board LEDs signification
Hardware Failure:
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (or on the power
supply alarms).
ORANGE after pressing LAT button.
Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both
standards.
The available alarms are the following.
PDU Front Panel LED Markings (ANSI):
CRI: Critical alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
MAJ: Major alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
MIN: Minor alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
RACK: Alarm storing from one of the shelves in the rack
TRU Front Panel LED Markings (ETSI):
URG: Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
NURG: Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
ATTD: Attended: acknowledged URG or NURG alarm
SIG PRES: Signal presence (power on)

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

221/259

3.13.5 LAN-Q board


IE-LAN INPUT

Ethernet
interface
adapter

IE-LAN OUT

Hex rotary switches

TP-RJ45

COAX
TRANSC

EQTYPE
SHELF-ID

3.13.5.1

N.B. If a wire is plugged on RJ45, BNC is


unavailable.
Figure 173 Block diagram of control LAN-Q board

Purposes

The purposes of the LAN-Q board are the following:


To provide the physical layer for the QB interface between the Equipment shelf (ESC-LC board)
and an external supervisor (e.g. 1353SH).
To provide the 4 bits Equipment type Codification, necessary for the application stored in the
Equipment Controller.
To provide the 8 bits Shelf Identification number (i.e.: MAC address necessary to build up the IP
address of the shelf where the LAN-Q board is installed.
3.13.5.2

Description

The LAN-Q board has to be plugged in slot #8 of the 1692MSE compact shelf or slot #26 of the CO
shelf. It is linked to the ESC-LC board by a backpanel link.
The link to external supervision equipment is ensured by 2 BNC connectors or by one RJ 45 connector.
The Equipment Type Codification is ensured by the hexadecimal rotary switch CW3.
The Shelf Identification is ensured by the two hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2.
For a 1692MSE NE, the switches setting values are mandatory (B, F, 5).
Jumper configuration
For operation with the ESC-LC, only the following jumper settings are permitted:
No jumper
Jumper between pins A-D

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

222/259

Front panel

Back panel
6 pins host for jumper
Rotary wheels
Figure 174 LAN-Q board settings

3.13.5.3

LEDs signification
Table 122 Meaning of LAN-Q board LEDs signification
Hardware Failure:
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (or on the power
supply alarms).
ORANGE after pressing LAT button.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

223/259

3.14 FANS unit


If the power consumption of the WLA is high enough, fans are necessary to dissipate the heat.
3.14.1 FAN-CO unit

PSC

PSC
LAN

ESC-LC

The fan is located at the bottom of the shelf. The use of fans requires an air filter be placed just below.
This is shown in the following figure.

FAN-CO

Air filter

Figure 175 Fan shelf description and rack partitioning


One FAN-CO module is placed at the bottom of the shelf, in the slot 49.
The FANS are monitored via SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the Housekeeping/Remote
Alarms module to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system.
Max Power dissipation per shelf: 400 W.
3.14.2 FAN unit
On the 1692MSE shelf, FAN unit is located on the left side of the compact shelf. The use of fans
requires putting an air filter just aside.

Air
filter

FAN
13

WLA-P/WLA

Slot 6

WLA-P/WLA
WLA-P/WLA
WLA-P/WLA
C-MDX-U/C-MDX-E-U-S
ESC-LC

Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 1

12 PSC2
11 OSC
10
9 OMSP
8 LAN-Q
7 PSC2

Figure 176 FAN description and Shelf partitioning


The FAN unit is placed in the left slot of the 1692MSE shelf and is equipped with two fans with

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

224/259

speedometer sensors to essentially dissipate the heat coming from WLA and C-4xANY boards
essentially. The FAN board is mandatorily provided.
3.14.3 LEDs signification
One bi-color LED on the front-panel of the FAN/FAN-CO card is available.
Table 123 Meaning of FAN/FAN-CO board LEDs signification
Hardware Failure:
GREEN when Power is on.
RED when Hardware failure (HWF).
ORANGE after pressing LAT button.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

225/259

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

226/259

MAINTENANCE

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

227/259

MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION

EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBWERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
4.1.2.IN HANDBOOK GUIDE

4.1 Maintenance introduction


4.1.1

General safety rules


SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front panel warning labels prior to working on optical connections
while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed to switch
off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station
distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by -48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance,
dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove
rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise
caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the rules pointed
out in para.3.2.4.2 in Handbook guide.

4.1.2

General rules

Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD
connector protections, etc).
In order to reduce the risk of damage the electrostatic sensitive devices, is mandatory to use the
elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack during the
touching of the equipment.
4.1.3

Maintenance - definitions

Maintenance consists of a set of operation which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:
ROUTINE (PREVENTIVE)
Routine (preventive) maintenance consists in carrying out a number of periodic operations to minimize
the risk of a failure on a link.
These operations can be scheduled or initiated by the equipment supervision system.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

228/259

CORRECTIVE
Corrective maintenance consists in carrying out a minimum number of operations to repair a fault as
rapidly as possible.
These operations are initiated by the equipment supervision system and limited to replacement of
boards.
Definition of the technical level of the maintenance agent:
It is mandatory for the technicians in charge of the equipment maintenance to be familiar with the
measurement techniques used on equipment fitted with optical connectors.
4.1.4

Instruments And Accessories

There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the operators handbook.
Where TMN is implemented, an Operation System displays alarms and manages all the connected
Equipments of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
The need of special tools and accessories to perform possible routine and corrective maintenance
procedures is described inside the procedures themselves.

4.2 Preventive maintenance


The ALCATEL1692MSE equipment requires no systematic preventive maintenance.
4.2.1

Routine maintenance every year


SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be
caused by 48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal
jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid
shorting power input terminals.

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:


Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
Make sure that the shelf has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws to guarantee grounding
(the rack is connected to the station ground).
4.2.2

Routine maintenance of fan filter

According to the filter type, it is suggested to carry out the following operations:
Fan filter cleaning (3AL_86633_AA**) for 1692 CO shelf;
Fan filter cleaning (3AN_51151_AA**) for 1692 compact shelf
The fan filter is the practice adopted for equipment installed in locations where the environmental
conditions are compliant to EN 300 019-1-3 edition: 2004, class 3.1 and 3.2.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

229/259

(Caution to avoid equipment damage)


SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused
by the rotating fans.
Replace the Fan filter from the FAN Shelf as follows:
Unscrew the screws that ensure the fan filter to the fans shelf
Extract the fan filter
Clean the fan filter removing the dust using a brush. It's not recommend to use water (to avoid
rusting the metal parts).
Insert and ensure the Fan filter to the FAN shelf using the relevant screw.
N.B.
It is required to clean the fan filter every 3 to 6 months. And the fan filter should be replaced
at least once a year. The period can be shorter depending on the location environmental conditions.

4.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)


Since the troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the use of the Craft Terminal, for details,
please refer to the Maintenance section of 1692MSE R3.2A Operators Handbook
(3AL_97869_ADAA) or Troubleshooting Handbook.

ATTACHING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

(Caution to avoid equipment damage)

The screw tightening torque for attaching the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by
screws) into the shelf must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %


Exceeding this value may result in the screw breaking.

4.4 Set of spare parts


4.4.1

Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the
average amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also
during MTTR; the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
4.4.2

General rules on spare parts management

Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating
equipment It is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare
parts are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

230/259

If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
The spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes;
The spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g.,
gas);
If during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent
thermal shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the
replaced one.
4.4.3

Particular rules on spare parts management

Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to different
versions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows spare
part stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into
the unit (program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare
unit must be used.
At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save the
equipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out the
equipment it refers to.

4.5 Operating advices


For this release 3.2A the user should take into account the following advice about the Equipment.
Software management
At the occurrence of one of the following things, select the CT EnvironmentProcess control from
the main menu to first close the EML-USM process and then restart the NE.
Having changed the IP address if the corresponding IP access mode has been used to manage
the NE.
The EML-USM doesnt work anymore.
The WLA will not lock frequency when the signal frequency changes from higher to lower, if the higher
frequency is times of lower one, e.g. change from STM-4 to STM-1, the bit rate read for FPGA is till
STM-4 because of the chip's feature. This rule applies on SDH, GE and Fiber channel.
The 3 STM-4 drawer configurations are the only configuration, which support a STM-4 rate in the first
drawer position. Consequently, there is a STM-4 configurations order to respect to avoid having only
one STM-4 drawer left in position 1. This should be followed by a STM-4 drawer de-configuration
order for the same reasons, which is not the case.
Others
The time zone on PC should be set as "(GMT) Casablanca, Monrovia. This time zone needn't be
changed for daylight savings time.
The button label's language on info-box is the same as the OS default language.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

231/259

4.6 Repair Form


To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in the
following figure. The repair form must be filled-in with as much data as possible and returned to
Alcatel together with the faulty unit.

Figure 177 Repair form

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

232/259

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

233/259

DISMANTLING & RECYLING

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

234/259

DISMANTLING & RECYCLING

5.1 WEEE general information


A new European directive was published on the 13th of February 2003 on wastes of electrical and
electronic equipment (Directive 2002/96/EC).
The general principle promoted by this directive is the producer responsibility in the management of
the wastes coming from the products he puts on the market. The producer responsibility now covers
the end of life of the products sold.
This new split of responsibility will have impacts on Alcatel practices both as a producer of EEE
equipment but also as an owner of EEE equipment.
From August 13th 2005, Waste electrical and Electronic equipment (e-Waste) directive sets rules in
terms of operational and financial responsibility for the collection and treatment of electrical and
electronic equipment in Europe.
Two responsibility regimes have been defined:
Waste of household equipment. Alcatel only household implication is through its Joint
Venture with TCL on mobile phone TAMP. Alcatel will check the appropriate consideration of
the WEEE directive in the Joint Venture which covers the subject by itself independently from the
Alcatel e-waste implementation project.
Waste of professional equipment. Alcatel owns and produces professional equipment; As a
consequence this Chapter 12 of this handbook focuses on professional equipment responsibility
regime.
There are two e-waste streams to be considered:
Historical e-waste or waste of equipment put on the market before August 13th 2005 Two
possible regimes left open to implementation in each member state:
either the owner of the equipment is responsible
or
the producer of a new equipment which is purchased to replace an old equipment
Future waste or waste of equipment put on the market after August 13th 2005.The producer
of the equipment being sold is responsible unless otherwise specified in contract with Customer.
In order to know when a unit or subrack has been put on the market it is necessary to read the date
present on the Label affixed on the product (refer to para. 4.4 for Label position and type). In the
following figure an example is given:

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

235/259

FA011963580
Alcatel

Location Company

Year

Week

Date of production

Progressive Number

Example:
FA

Alcatel Italy Citt Ducale

01

Last two digits of production year; in the example is 2001

19

Week 19 in year 2001

63580

Product progressive number


Figure 178 Put on the market date

In next paragraphs is given a description example of how to disassemble an equipment; the same
principle can be applied to all the subracks and units composing the equipment.
The unit chosen for disassembly is one of the most complex.
Para. 5.2 describes the equipment disassembly; in detail:
Para. 5.2.1 lists all the units composing the equipment with the relevant Waste code.
Waste code permits to know the weight of the Subrack or Unit and the percentage of
material composing the single item.
Para. 5.2.2 lists the tools necessary for disassembly
Para. 5.2.3 describes the subrack disassembly
Para. 5.2.4 describes the unit disassembly
Para. 5.2.5 describes the procedure to apply in order to manage Hazardous materials and
components (example battery)
Para. 5.3 reports the ECO declaration information.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

236/259

5.2 How to disassembly equipment


This equipment is designed for easy disassembly, by using screws and rivets for mechanical assembly
of subracks and modules. The variety of screw types is minimized.
Tools necessary for subrack and units disassembly are reported in para. 5.2.2.
The disassembly process depends on the respective recycling methods and can be derived from the
delivered assembly instructions of the product.
Table 124 and Table 125 list all the units composing the equipment with the relevant Waste code.
Waste code allows to know the weight of the Subrack or Unit and the percentage of material utilized
for the single item.
5.2.1

Waste codes detailed information

In Table 124 and Table 125 are listed all the items composing this equipment.
In the column Waste Code it is possible to find the weight and the materials composing each Part
Number according to the following rule:
Material Types:
A Alluminium
B Stainless Steel
C Steel
E Cables
F Motors
G Plastic
H Back Panel
J Generic PCB
K PCB with electronic Capacitors
L LCD display ( major than 100 cm2)
M Cathode Ray Tube (Lead, Mercury, Phosfhors)
N Battery (Lithium, Cadmium, Mercury)
X Others
Example:
W1000J60A20X20
Means:
W1000=Overall Weight of the item in grams
J60= 60% Generic PCB = 600 grams
A20= 20% Alluminium = 200 grams
X20= 20% Other materials =200 grams

Figure 179 Waste code interpretation

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

237/259

Table 124
Name

ALCATEL Code

Waste Code

1692 Metrospan Edge Compact Shelf / 2


1692 Metrospan Edge Compact Shelf / 3
1692 Metrospan Edge CO shelf
Optinex rack with TRU & Door
Optinex rack with TRU
Low Cost Equipment and Shelf Controller
Local Access Network card
Power Supply Card
Power Supply Card2
Power Supply Card3
Compact FAN / 2
CO FAN module
Housekeeping card
Rack Alarm Interface board
Intershelf Link Slave

ESC-LC
LAN-Q
PSC
PSC2
PSC3
FAN
FAN-CO
HK
RAI
I-LINK-S

3AL 97679 AA**


3AL 97679 AB**
3AL 86607 AA**
3AL 37952 AA**
3AN 44815 AA**
3AL 97690 AA**
3AL 86653 AA**
3AL 86652 AA**
3AL 86888 AA**
3AL 86652 AB**
3AL 97682 AA**
3AL 86625 AA**
3AL 86668 AA**
3AL 87009 AA**
3AL 86808 AA**

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

Optical Multiplex Section Protection card


Supervision Management card

OMSP
OSC

3AL 97541 AA**


3AL 97540 AA**

t.b.d
t.b.d

Wavelength Adaptor3 Without O-SNCP


Wavelength Adapte3 With O-SNCP

WLA3C
WLA3COP

3AL 97795 AA**


3AL 97795 AB**

t.b.d
t.b.d

OCC10-NA-1550 (193.300)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.000)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.100)
OCC10-NA-1550 (193.200)
OCC10-NA-1530 (195.900)
OCC10-EC-1530
OCC10-EC-1550

3AL 95313 AA**


3AL 95313 AB**
3AL 95313 AC**
3AL 95313 AD**
3AL 95314 AA**
8DG81002AA**
8DG81002AB**

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

3AL 97800 AA**


3AL 97878 AA**

t.b.d
t.b.d

L1.1
2M
S1.1

1AB194670002
1AB209860001
1AB194670001

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

S1.1_DDM

1AB194670004

t.b.d

L1.2_DDM

1AB194670006

t.b.d

OCC10-No Amplified Ch193.300 (1550)


OCC10-No Amplified Ch193.000 (1550)
OCC10-No Amplified Ch193.100 (1550)
OCC10-No Amplified Ch193.200 (1550)
OCC10-No Amplified Ch195.900 (1530)
OCC10-Enhanced-CWDM (1530)
OCC10-Enhanced-CWDM (1550)
2XGE
2XGE-FC
SFP transceiver L1.1 RT (1310nm)
SFP transceiver 2M (1310nm)
SFP transceiver S1.1 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver S1.1 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver L1.2 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver S16.1 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver S16.1 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver L16.1 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver L16.2 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver S4.1 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver S4.1 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver L4.2 (1310nm) B&W with
DDM
SFP transceiver I16 (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver I16 (1310nm) B&W with DDM
SFP transceiver 1000Base-SX (850nm) B&W
SFP transceiver 1000Base-SX (850nm) B&W
with DDM
SFP transceiver 1000Base-LX (1310nm) B&W
SFP transceiver 1000Base-LX (1310nm) B&W
with DDM
SFP transceiver 1000Base-ZX (1550nm) B&W
with DDM
SFP transceiver FC/2FC-SX (850nm) B&W
with DDM
SFP transceiver FC/2FC-LX (1310nm) B&W
with DDM

ED

Items waste codes list


Mnemonic

01

S16.1

1AB196370001

t.b.d

S16.1_DDM

1AB196370006

t.b.d

L16.1

1AB196370004

t.b.d

L16.2

1AB196370003

t.b.d

S4.1

1AB196360001

t.b.d

S4.1_DDM

1AB196360004

t.b.d

L4.2_DDM

1AB196360007

t.b.d

I16
I16_DDM
GbE_SX

1AB196370002
1AB196370005
1AB187280002

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

GbE_SX_DDM

1AB187280033

t.b.d

GbE_LX

1AB187280001

t.b.d

GbE_LX_DDM

1AB187280031

t.b.d

GbE_ZX_DDM

1AB187280042

t.b.d

2FC SX_DDM

1AB187280037

t.b.d

2FC LX_DDM

1AB187280038

t.b.d

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

238/259

CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN


receiver (1470nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1490nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1510nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1530nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1550nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1570nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1590nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1610nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1470nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1490nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1510nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1530nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1550nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1570nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1590nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver Standard (1610nm)
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1470nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1490nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1510nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1530nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1550nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1570nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1590nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with PIN
receiver (1610nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1470nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1490nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1510nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1530nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1550nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1570nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1590nm) with DDM
CWDM wavelength SFP transceiver with APD
receiver (1610nm) with DDM
4xANY Host card
High speed 1310nm optical drawer
Low speed 1310nm optical drawer
High speed 850nm optical drawer
Low speed 850nm optical drawer
STM-1/4 optical drawer/2

ED

01

1470_Bronze

1AB196340001

t.b.d

1490_Bronze

1AB196340002

t.b.d

1510_Bronze

1AB196340003

t.b.d

1530_Bronze

1AB196340004

t.b.d

1550_Bronze

1AB196340005

t.b.d

1570_Bronze

1AB196340006

t.b.d

1590_Bronze

1AB196340007

t.b.d

1610_Bronze

1AB196340008

t.b.d

1470_Silver

1AB196350001

t.b.d

1490_Silver

1AB196350002

t.b.d

1510_Silver

1AB196350003

t.b.d

1530_Silver

1AB196350004

t.b.d

1550_Silver

1AB196350005

t.b.d

1570_Silver

1AB196350006

t.b.d

1590_Silver

1AB196350007

t.b.d

1610_Silver

1AB196350008

t.b.d

1470_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340009

t.b.d

1490_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340010

t.b.d

1510_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340011

t.b.d

1530_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340012

t.b.d

1550_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340013

t.b.d

1570_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340014

t.b.d

1590_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340015

t.b.d

1610_Bronze_DDM

1AB196340016

t.b.d

1470_Silver_DDM

1AB196350026

t.b.d

1490_Silver_DDM

1AB196350027

t.b.d

1510_Silver_DDM

1AB196350028

t.b.d

1530_Silver_DDM

1AB196350029

t.b.d

1550_Silver_DDM

1AB196350030

t.b.d

1570_Silver_DDM

1AB196350031

t.b.d

1590_Silver_DDM

1AB196350032

t.b.d

1610_Silver_DDM

1AB196350033

t.b.d

C-4xANY
HF_1310 Drawer
LF_1310 Drawer
HF_850 Drawer
LF_850 Drawer
SDH_1310 Drawer

3AL 95063 AA**


3AL 86672 AA**
3AL 86674 AA**
3AL 86870 AA**
3AL 86869 AA**
3AL 95284 AA**

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

239/259

Unidirectional MUX/DEMUX without OSC


filter
Unidirectional MUX/DEMUXE with OSC filter
Bi-directional MUX/DEMUX without OSC filter
Bi-directional MUX/DEMUX with OSC filter

C-MDX-U

3AL 97538 AB**

t.b.d

C-MDX-E-U-S
C-MDX-B
C-MDX-B-S

3AL 97769 AA**


3AL 97538 AC**
3AL 97538 AD**

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

C-MDX2-U

3AL 97654 AA**

W885A5B36E7G5J47

C-MDX2-E-U-S

3AL 97772 AA**

W880A5B36E7G5J47

C-MDX2-E-1-S

3AL 97772 BA**

W700A7B45E2G4J42

2-channel unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2E with


OSC filter

C-MDX2-E-2-4749-S
C-MDX2-E-2-5153-S
C-MDX2-E-2-5557-S
C-MDX2-E-2-5961-S

3AL 97772 CA**


3AL 97772 CB**
3AL 97772 CC**
3AL 97772 CD**

W775A6B41E4G3J46
W775A6B41E4G3J46
W775A6B41E4G3J46
W775A6B41E4G3J46

1-channel unidirectional OADM without OSC


filter

C-OAD-U-1-4747
C-OAD-U-1-4949
C-OAD-U-1-5151
C-OAD-U-1-5353
C-OAD-U-1-5555
C-OAD-U-1-5757
C-OAD-U-1-5959
C-OAD-U-1-6161

3AL 97539 AB**


3AL 97539 AC**
3AL 97539 AD**
3AL 97539 AE**
3AL 97539 AF**
3AL 97539 AG**
3AL 97539 AH**
3AL 97539 AJ**

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

1-channel unidirectional OADME with OSC


filter

C-OAD-E-U-1-4747-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-4949-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5151-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5353-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5555-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5757-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-5959-S
C-OAD-E-U-1-6161-S

3AL 97770 AA**


3AL 97770 AB**
3AL 97770 AC**
3AL 97770 AD**
3AL 97770 AE**
3AL 97770 AF**
3AL 97770 AG**
3AL 97770 AH**

t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d
t.b.d

1-channel unidirectional OADM2 without


OSC filter

C-OAD2-U-1-4747
C-OAD2-U-1-4949
C-OAD2-U-1-5151
C-OAD2-U-1-5353
C-OAD2-U-1-5555
C-OAD2-U-1-5757
C-OAD2-U-1-5959
C-OAD2-U-1-6161

3AL 97653 AA**


3AL 97653 AB**
3AL 97653 AC**
3AL 97653 AD**
3AL 97653 AE**
3AL 97653 AF**
3AL 97653 AG**
3AL 97653 AH**

W867A5B37E6G5J47
W867A5B37E6G5J47
W867A5B37E6G5J47
W867A5B37E6G5J47
W867A5B37E6G5J47
W867A5B37E6G5J47
W867A5B37E6G5J47
W867A5B37E6G5J47

1-channel unidirectional OADM2E with OSC


filter

C-OAD2-E-U-1-4747-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-4949-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5151-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5353-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5555-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5757-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-5959-S
C-OAD2-E-U-1-6161-S

3AL 97771 AA**


3AL 97771 AB**
3AL 97771 AC**
3AL 97771 AD**
3AL 97771 AE**
3AL 97771 AF**
3AL 97771 AG**
3AL 97771 AH**

W880A5B36E7G5J47
W880A5B36E7G5J47
W880A5B36E7G5J47
W880A5B36E7G5J47
W880A5B36E7G5J47
W880A5B36E7G5J47
W880A5B36E7G5J47
W880A5B36E7G5J47

2-channel unidirectional OADM without OSC


filter

C-OAD-U-2-47474949
C-OAD-U-2-51515353
C-OAD-U-2-55555757
C-OAD-U-2-59596161

3AL 97539 PA**


3AL 97539 QA**
3AL 97539 RA**
3AL 97539 SA**

W885A5B36E7G5J47
W885A5B36E7G5J47
W885A5B36E7G5J47
W885A5B36E7G5J47

2-channel unidirectional OADME with OSC


filter

C-OAD-E-U-2-47474949-S
C-OAD-E-U-2-51515353-S
C-OAD-E-U-2-55555757-S
C-OAD-E-U-2-59596161-S

3AL 97770 BA**


3AL 97770 BB**
3AL 97770 BC**
3AL 97770 BD**

W905A5B35E9G5J46
W905A5B35E9G5J46
W905A5B35E9G5J46
W905A5B35E9G5J46

2-channel unidirectional OADM2 without


OSC filter

C-OAD2-U-2-47474949
C-OAD2-U-2-51515353
C-OAD2-U-2-55555757
C-OAD2-U-2-59596161

3AL 97653 BE**


3AL 97653 BF**
3AL 97653 BG**
3AL 97653 BH**

W885A5B36E7G5J47
W885A5B36E7G5J47
W885A5B36E7G5J47
W885A5B36E7G5J47

2-channel unidirectional OADM2E with OSC


filter

C-OAD2-E-U-2-47474949-S
C-OAD2-E-U-2-51515353-S

3AL 97771 BA**


3AL 97771 BB**

W900A5B35E8G5J47
W900A5B35E8G5J47

Unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2 without OSC filter


Unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2E with OSC
filter
1-channel unidirectional MUX/DEMUX2E with
OSC filter

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

240/259

C-OAD2-E-U-2-55555757-S
C-OAD2-E-U-2-59596161-S

3AL 97771 BC**


3AL 97771 BD**

W900A5B35E8G5J47
W900A5B35E8G5J47

4-channel unidirectional OADM2 without


OSC filter

C-OAD2-U-4-47495153
C-OAD2-U-4-55575961

3AL 97653 CA**


3AL 97653 CC**

t.b.d
t.b.d

4-channel unidirectional OADM2E with OSC


filter

C-OAD2-E-U-4-47495153-S
C-OAD2-E-U-4-55575961-S

3AL 97771 CA**


3AL 97771 CB**

t.b.d
t.b.d

1-channel bi-directional OADM without OSC


filter

C-OAD-B-1-4755
C-OAD-B-1-4957
C-OAD-B-1-5159
C-OAD-B-1-5361

3AL 97539 FA**


3AL 97539 GA**
3AL 97539 HA**
3AL 97539 JA**

W933A5B34E9G4J48
W933A5B34E9G4J48
W933A5B34E9G4J48
W933A5B34E9G4J48

1-channel bi-directional OADM with OSC


filter

C-OAD-B-1-4755-S
C-OAD-B-1-4957-S
C-OAD-B-1-5159-S
C-OAD-B-1-5361-S

3AL 97539 BA**


3AL 97539 CA**
3AL 97539 DA**
3AL 97539 EA**

W948A5B33E8G5J49
W948A5B33E8G5J49
W948A5B33E8G5J49
W948A5B33E8G5J49

N.B.
2XGE board and 2XGE-FC board have the same function. 2XGE with P/N 3AL97800AA**
only support DC48V, while 2XGE-FC with P/N 3AL97878AA** can support DC48/60V.
N.B.
PSC3 board is only used on CO shelf.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

241/259

5.2.2

Tools necessary for disassembly

The following tools are necessary for unit disassembly:


# T9 TORX screw driver
# T20 TORX screw driver
Crosshead screwdriver
Wrench #
Scissors
Protection gloves
5.2.3

Subrack disassembly

Figure 180 and Figure 181 is shown an example of subrack.


The same rules can be applied to the specific equipment to be dismantled. The front panel of the
subrack can be removed by loosing the two handles.

Figure 180 Subrack front view

Figure 181 Subrack rear view

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

242/259

Procedure:

Remove the screws in order to disassemble the top cover as reported in the following figure.

Figure 182 Top cover removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

243/259

Unscrew all the screws present on back cover as reported in the following figure.
Remove the rear cover in order to access the subrack Back Panel.

Figure 183 Back cover removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

244/259

Unscrew all the screws fastening the back board to the mechanical structure of the subrack as
indicated in the following figure.
Remove the back board from the subrack mechanical structure.

Figure 184 Back board removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

245/259

Remove the guides from the subrack as indicated in the following figure.

Figure 185 Guides removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

246/259

Unscrew the screws fastening the dummy front panel to the mechanical structure of the subrack.
And pick out the fixing bars as indicated in the following figure.

Figure 186 Dummy front panels and fixing bars removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

247/259

Remove the side wall by unscrewing all the relevant screws as indicated in the following figure.

Fixing bars

5
Figure 187 Side wall removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

248/259

5.2.4

Unit disassembly

Figure 188 Unit view

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

249/259

Procedure:

Remove the two screws from the bottom cover as indicated in the following figure.

Figure 189 Bottom cover removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

250/259

Remove the screws that fix the two levers and subsequently pull out them from the front plate as
indicated in the following figure.

Figure 190 Levers removal

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

251/259

Extract the front panel from board as indicated in the following figure.
Extract the fibers from the adapters as indicated in the following figure.
Extract the fibers from the fiber supports as indicated in the following figure.
Extract the gasket from the front panel as indicated in the following figure.

Extract

Figure 191 Front panel, fibers and gasket removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

252/259

Remove the screws from PCB as indicated in the following figure.


Remove the heat sink from the PCB board as indicated in the following figure.

Figure 192 Heat sink removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

253/259

Remove the screws that fix the barket to board and pull it out from the board (refer to Figure
193).

Figure 193 Barket removing

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

254/259

5.2.5

Hazardous materials and components

Table 125 lists the presence (or not) of hazardous substance/components.


N.B.

The system cabling is designed for reduced halogen content. All the traffic cabling is fully
PVC free.
Table 125

List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment


Presence
In The
Materials/Substances
Where
Equipment
Batteries External
NO
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
Batteries Internal
NO
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
Mercury
NO
Cadmium
NO
Capacitors with PCBs
Capacitors with substances of concern +
height > 25 mm, diameter > 25 mm or
NO
proportionately similar volume
Gas discharge lamps
NO
Mercury containing Backlighting lamps
NO
Plastic containing brominated flame
retardants other than in Printed Circuit
NO
Assemblies.
Liquid Crystal Displays with a surface
NO
greater than 100 cm2
Asbestos
NO
Refractory ceramic fibers
NO
Protective plastic gloves must be used in
order to avoid contact between hands
Thermal conductive paste
YES
and thermal conductive paste.
Pay attention to avoid contact of thermal
conductive paste with eyes.
Radio-active substances
NO
Beryllium Oxide
NO
Refer to Figure 191.
N.B.: Copper-beryllium contact spring
Other forms of Beryllium
YES
must be separated from other material
and must be fused in a specific
regulated environment.
Pressure volume
NO
Liquids Volume
NO
Gasses Volume
NO
Hidden mechanical springs or other
NO
equivalent parts.
Ozone depleting substances, according to
those categories that are already banned in
NO
the Montreal protocol.
Chloroparaffins with chain length 10-13 C
atoms, chlorination greater than 50%
NO
contained in mechanical plastic parts
heavier than 25g.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

255/259

Lead contained in mechanical parts heavier


than 25g.
Polychlorinated
biphenyls
(PCB)
or
polychlorinated terphenyls (PCT)
Polybrominated biphenyls and their
others (CAS no. 32534-81-9, CAS no.
32536-52-0, CAS no 1163-19-5, CAS no.
13654-09-6) contained in mechanical
parts heavier than 25g, in concentrations
exceeding the natural background levels.

ED

01

NO
NO

NO

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

256/259

5.3 Eco declaration


The 1692MSE product release 3.2A is CWDM equipment intended for the METRO ACCESS, enterprise
and METRO CORE in the small cities. It is compliant with both ETSI and NEBS (level3) standards. It is
designed for a small number of channels (8 in this version) and for very low cost application, without
amplifiers.
Key features
Refer to para. 1.4 for details.
Dimensional and Weight Characteristics
Refer to para. 2.2, 2.3 and 2.5.1 for details.
EXTENSION OF SYSTEM LIFETIME
The product is designed to ensure an outstanding quality of services through very high traffic
transmission, connection and protection performances and minimum service interruption.

The life utility is at least 5 years. This means that maintenance will be assured for at least 5 years. The
system architecture facilitates future extensibility and upgradability:
On-site configuration changes as for example the extension of the node traffic capacity without
re-cabling of interconnections.
Implementation of new features and functionalities by remote Software download.
The terms and conditions of warranty, service availability and spare parts availability are individually
agreed between Alcatel and the Customer and are part of the relevant contractual commitments.
POWER CONSUMPTION
Refer to para. 2.5 for details.
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION
Regarding compliance with radio frequency emission requirements refer to para. 1.9.
ACOUSTICAL NOISE
Refer to para. 1.9.2.5 for details.
MATERIALS
Refer to paragraph 5.2.5 for details.
DISASSEMBLY
Refer to paragraph 5.2 for details.
BATTERIES
The product requires no backup batteries.
PACKAGING
The packaging of this Alcatel equipment complies with the directive 94/62/EEC concerning packaging
and packaging waste. Depending on the means of transportation, the racks are packed in a
cardboard or wooden box, which can easily be recycled after use. Environmentally harmful materials
are not used for packaging. The packaging materials are marked according to ISO 11 469. If
required by the Customer and agreed by both parties, Alcatel can take care of the proper disposal of
all packaging materials.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

257/259

For details refer to Installation Handbook.


TAKE BACK INFORMATION
On request of customers, Alcatel can take care of the take back of depreciated equipment and of the
ecological safe and appropriate disposal under conditions to be agreed.
For that purpose Alcatel co-operates with qualified companies.
DOCUMENTATION
In order to reduce paper consumption for Customer Documentation, Alcatel delivers the Generic
Customer Documentation on a CD-ROM. The CD-ROM contains interactive HW Descriptions, SW
Descriptions, Functional Descriptions, Maintenance Manuals and User Guides. This allows the
operator to put the documentation on a server accessible by all relevant people in the organization
without any additional paper copies.

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

258/259

END OF DOCUMENT

ED

01

RL
3AL 97869 AAAA

259/259

You might also like